SlideShare a Scribd company logo
SWPBS Appendices




               School-wide Positive
                Behavior Support


                          Appendices                                     1




                   Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports
                               University of Oregon & Connecticut
                                        Ver. May 14 2010




1
 This document is supported in part by the OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and
Supports (http://pbis.org). The Center is supported by a grant from the Office of Special Education
Programs, US Department of Education (H326S98003). Opinions expressed herein are those of the
authors and do not necessarily reflect the position of the US Department of Education, and such
endorsements should not be inferred.
SWPBS Appendices


                                        APPENDICES

       Appendix                                       Description

A   School-Wide PBS          An example of one school’s implementation of SWPBS is
    Implementation           provided: leadership team, behavior purpose statement,
    Example                  school-wide and classroom-wide expectations, teaching
                             matrices, encouragement procedures, rule violation
                             procedures, and progress monitoring and data systems

B   Committee, Group,        This stand-alone activity gives leadership teams a structure
    Team Self-Assessment     for identifying what behavioral initiatives, programs, and
    and Action Planning      interventions are in place, and evaluating how SWPBS fits
                             with these efforts. The specific goal is to develop an
                             effective, efficient, and relevant continuum of positive
                             behavior support practices and processes for all students

C   Effective Behavior       This self-assessment is used by leadership teams to
    Support Self-            determine staff perceptions about the status of the social
    Assessment Survey        and behavioral climate of the school. Perceptions about
                             supports for school-wide, classroom, nonclassroom, and
                             individual students are assessed. All school staff are usually
                             included.

D   Team Implementation      Leadership teams and coaches use this self-assessment to
    Checklist (TIC)          monitor their initial and on-going SWPBS implementation. As
                             such, leadership teams self-manage their implementation
                             efforts.

E   SWPBS Team Monthly       This organizational tool is used by leadership teams,
    Planning Guide           coaches, coordinators teams to supplement their review and
                             action planning efforts, especially at the beginning and end
                             of the school year. Emphasis is on first year implementation
                             of primary intervention tier of SWPBS.                              The purpose

F   Detention and            This FAQ has been developed to provide a general summary
    Suspension: Frequently   of the implementation considerations and features of
    Asked Questions          detention and suspension consequences. A question/answer
                             format is used.

G   Functional Assessment    Two self-assessment checklists are provided to enable
    and Behavior Support     review of the components and processes of completing a
    Plan Checklists          functional behavioral assessment and developing a
                             behavioral intervention plan.
SWPBS Appendices



H   Functional Assessment     The FACTS is an instrument used to guide the completion of
    Checklists for Teachers   a functional behavioral assessment and facilitate the
    and Staff (FACTS)         development of a behavior intervention plan.

I   Emergency Prevention      This primer provides general guidelines and considerations
    and Response              for being prepared, preventing, and responding to crises and
                              emergency situations.

J   Teaching Social Skills    A basic and general lesson plan and examples for teaching
                              social behavior are provided.

K   SWPBS and RtI             A brief overview of the similar and different features of
                              school-wide positive behavior support and responsiveness to
                              intervention.

L   Selected References       These references provide additional and supporting
                              information for the contents of this workbook.

M   Data-based Decision       Guidelines and examples for establishing efficient and
    Making and Office         effective data-based decision making systems. Emphasis is
    Discipline Referrals      on formalizing and enhancing office disciplinary procedures.

N   Restraint and Seclusion   Guidelines and considerations for the appropriate and
    Considerations and        ethical use of restraint and seclusion in the context of the
    SWPBS                     implementation of SWPBS.

O   Planning for the          Worksheet to guide planning for the beginning and end of
    Beginning/Ending of       the school year in a SWPBS school.
    the School Year
SWPBS Appendices




         Appendix A

School-Wide PBS Implementation
           Example
SWPBS Appendices


    COMPONENTS AND PROCESSES OF SCHOOL-WIDE DISCIPLINE: EXAMPLE
                    (Sugai, Colvin, Hagan-Burke, & Lewis-Palmer)


      The following example is for a hypothetical school (“G. Ikuma Elementary
School”) and is provided to illustrate the application of the general components and
processes of school-wide discipline.


                            Example Purpose Statement

                             G. Ikuma Elementary School
      G. Ikuma School is a community of learners. We are here to learn, grow, and
                               become good citizens.



                        Example of Behavioral Expectations

                               At G. Ikuma School, we
                               Respect ourselves
                               Respect property
                               Respect others
                               Respect learning


.
SWPBS Appendices



                 Example Teaching Matrix for G. Ikuma School-Wide Behavioral Expectations



           CLASSROOM            LUNCHROOM                 BUS               HALLWAY         PLAYGROUND



           Use inside voice      Eat your own          Stay in your         Stay to the      Wait your turn
Respect
                                     food                 seat                 right
Others      Raise hand to                                                                    Review game
             answer/talk        Leave space for      Use inside voice      Keep moving           rules
                                  others to sit
           Recycle paper                            Keep feet on the       Put trash in      At bell return
                                 Return trays
Respect                                                  floor                cans            equipment
Property   Put writing tools
                                Use own napkin           Walk on           Close doors      Use equipment
             inside desk
                                                        sidewalks             slowly         as designed


            Do your best          Wash your           Be at stop on          Use your        Have a plan
Respect                            hands                  time                words
Yourself         Ask                                                                        Look before you
                                  Eat healthy         Sit up straight      Know where             act
                                    foods                                  you’re going
SWPBS Appendices



  Example Teaching Matrix for G. Ikuma Classroom-Wide Behavioral Expectations



  Typical                   Classroom-Wide Rules/Expectations
 Contexts/
 Routines      Respect Others         Respect Property             Respect Self

               Use inside voice         Recycle paper
                                                                   Do your best
All              Raise hand to         Put writing tools
                                                                        Ask
                  answer/talk            inside desk

                                     Put announcements
Morning        Eyes on speaker                                   Put check by my
                                           in desk
Meeting       Give brief answers                                 announcements
                                      Keep feet on floor

                 Do own work         Put homework neatly       Turn in lesson on time
Homework                                    in box
                 Turn in before                                   Do homework
                    lesson           Touch your work only        night/day before

               Use inside voice      Put/get materials first        Have plan
Transition
              Keep hands to self      Keep hands to self            Go directly

              Raise hand or show
“I Need        “Assistance Card”                                    Have plan
                                     Have materials ready
Assistance”   Wait 2 minutes & try                                 Ask if unclear
                     again

Teacher        Eyes on speaker         Use materials as             Have plan
Directed      Keep hands to self          intended                      Ask

                                       Use materials as
Independent    Use inside voice                                Use time as planned
                                          intended
Work          Keep hands to self                                        Ask
                                       Return with done

Problem to     Stop, Step Back,        Stop Step Back,           Stop, Step Back,
Solve             Think, Act              Think, Act                Think, Act
SWPBS Appendices




                                     G. Ikuma Positive Reinforcement Procedures

        What             When                    By Whom               How Often              How Many                   Where

                  Whenever a student       All staff               Each occurrence        5-6 per day per staff   Anywhere at school
Positive Office   provides an                                                             member
Referrals         exemplary display of
                  a school-wide
(see form)        behavioral
                  expectations

                  Continuously &           All staff               As often as possible   No maximum number       Anywhere at school
                  contingently                                                            per staff member
                  whenever a student
Verbal praise     displays behavior
                  related to school-wide
                  behavioral
                  expectations

                  Continuously &           All staff, but          As often as possible   No maximum per staff    Nonclassroom
                  contingently             especially                                     member                  settings: hallways,
                  whenever a student       supervisors, teaching                                                  bus loading areas,
“Gotchas”         displays behavior        assistants, cafeteria                                                  playgrounds,
(see slip)        related to school-wide   workers, bus drivers,                                                  common areas,
                  expectations in          & administrators                                                       cafeteria, etc.
                  nonclassroom
                  settings
SWPBS Appendices



                        Continuously &           All classroom              At least hourly   No maximum per          Classroom settings
Classroom               contingently             teachers, teaching                           classroom               during instruction,
acknowledgements        whenever a student       assistants                                                           transitions,
(see individual         displays behavior                                                                             unstructured
classsroom              related to school-wide                                                                        activities, etc.
management plans)       expectations in
                        classroom settings

                        Whenever a               All substitute teachers    At any time       At least 3 every hour   Anywhere at school,
                        substitute teacher                                                                            but especially in
“Substitute Specials”   observes any student                                                                          classrooms
                        engaged in a
(see slip)              behavior related to
                        school-wide
                        expectations

“Office Specials”       Whenever office staff    Office staff: principal,   At any time       At least one per        Anywhere at school
                        recognize students       assistant principal,                         grade level per day
(bumper sticker,
                        for especially           counselor,
school pencil, store
                        noteworthy behavioral    secretaries, office
discount coupons,
                        growth, progress, or     assistants, etc.
lunch with Principal,
                        displays
etc.)
SWPBS Appendices




                                         Procedures for Rule Violations at G. Ikuma School

“Rule violations” are any behaviors that are not examples of stated school-wide behavioral expectations.

 Level           Definition                   Examples                                          Procedures

          Behaviors that do not             Minor inappropriate   1.   Inform student of rule violated
          require administrator             language
                                                                  2.   Describe expected behavior
          involvement, do not
          significantly violate rights      Late to class         3.   Complete minor incident slip, and give to homeroom teacher
          of others, do not put             Unprepared for        4.   Debrief event and reteach appropriate school-wide behavioral
          others at risk or harm, or        instruction
Minor                                                                  expectation (homeroom teacher)
          are not chronic
                                            Inappropriate use     5.   If third incident, process as major rule violation, inform parent
                                            of gum, hats,              (homeroom teacher) and develop precorrection intervention
                                            backpacks
                                            Etc.
SWPBS Appendices




           Behaviors that require         Profanity, verbal       1.   Inform student of rule violated
           administrator                  harassment
                                                                  2.   Describe expected behavior
           involvement, significantly
           violate rights of others,      Noncompliance/          3.   Complete office discipline referral form
           put others at risk or          insubordination
           harm, or are chronic                                   4.   Take student to office immediately
                                          Physical
                                          aggression,                  a. Review specifics of event while entering information into data
                                          harassment                      base
                                          Stealing                     b. Determine appropriate consequence
Major
                                          “3-peats” (3
                                                      rd               c.    Develop plan for completing consequence
                                          occurrence of                d. Inform parent
                                          minor rule violation)
                                                                       e. Develop precorrection intervention
                                          Etc.                              rd
                                                                  5.   If 3 major rule violation, complete referral to Student Success Team
                                                                       a. Complete functional behavioral assessment
                                                                       b. Develop behavior intervention plan


           Behaviors that violate         Illegal substances      1.   Inform student of rule violated rule
           district, city, and/or state
                                          Dangerous               2.   Describe expected behavior
           policy or laws
                                          weapons                 3.   Complete office discipline referral form
                                          Vandalism,              4.   Take student to office immediately
                                          destruction of
                                          property                     a. Inform parent
                                          Physical injury to           b. Convene Student Success Team
District
                                          others                       c.    Review specifics of event while entering information into data
                                          Etc.                               base
                                                                       d. Determine and implement appropriate consequence
                                                                  5.   Develop individualized positive behavior support plan
                                                                       a. Complete functional behavioral assessment
                                                                       b. Develop behavior intervention plan
SWPBS Appendices




                                                                  Example 2

  Rule-
Violating       Definition          Behavior Examples                                Procedures                               Involvement
  Level
Major       Law violating           Dangerous weapons             1. Immediately report event to administrator             Student, parent, law
Illegals    behavior requiring                                                                                             enforcement, school
                                    Substance possession,         2. Follow district/state policies and procedures
            municipal response                                                                                             & district
                                    truancy, vandalism,
                                                                  3. Document event                                        administrators,
                                    stealing,
                                                                                                                           school staff

Majors      Serious rule-           Repeated                      1. Signal that school rule-violating behavior            Student, staff person,
            violating behavior      noncompliance, serious           observed                                              parent, school
            that disrupts           aggression, skipping                                                                   administrator
                                                                  2. Restate desired/appropriate behavior
            teaching & learning,    class, directed profanity,
            puts student or         harassment, serious           3. Direct/escort student to office/administrator
            others at risk of       threats, tobacco,
                                                                  4. Document event with office discipline referral form
            harm, & requires        destruction of property,
            administrative action                                 5. Enter data into system
                                    “Third” minor in 24 hours.

Minors of   Rule violating risk     Disruptions, tardies, dress   1. Signal social behavior error has been made            Student, staff person,
Note        behavior which          code violations, teasing,                                                              homeroom teacher
                                                                  2. Restate/reteach appropriate behavior
            requires on-going
            monitoring                                            3. Provide positive reinforcer for next display of
                                                                     appropriate behavior
                                                                  4. Document event with office discipline referral form
                                                                  5. Enter data into system

Minors      Rule violating          Minor disruptions, off        1. Signal social behavior error has been made            Student, staff
            behavior which does     task,                                                                                  member
                                                                  2. Restate/reteach appropriate behavior
            not require on-going
            monitoring, but                                       3. Provide positive reinforcer for next display of
            needs to be retaught                                     appropriate behavior
Getting Started Appendices may 14_2010
SWPBS Appendices




    Data Decision System for Office Discipline Referrals at G. Ikuma School



At G. Ikuma School, office discipline referral data are reviewed at least monthly by
school administrators and the school-wide discipline leadership team. Data are
entered in a web-based computer system for easy storage, manipulation, and
reporting (School-Wide Information System2).

                           Question                                             Data Type

What is overall status of school-wide discipline in our            # of office discipline referrals
school?                                                            per day per month

                                                                   # & type of problem behaviors
What problem behaviors are we seeing?
                                                                   (minor, major, and illegal)

                                                                   # & location of problem
Where are problem behaviors being seen?
                                                                   behavior occurrences

                                                                   # & time of day of problem
When are problem behaviors being observed?
                                                                   behavior occurrences

                                                                   # of office discipline referrals
Which students are displaying problem behaviors?
                                                                   by student

Which grades/teachers are observing problem                        # of office discipline referrals
behaviors?                                                         by grade and teacher




2
 School-Wide Information System (SWIS) is is a web-based information system designed to help
school personnel to use office referral data to design school-wide and individual student interventions.
SWIS was developed and is managed by the OSEP Center for Positive Behavioral Interventions
and Supports at the University off Oregon. For more information about SWIS , go to www.swis.org.
SWPBS Appendices



How are data entered, stored, reported, and used in your school?



                                                        Data Storage
                                 Data
                      Data                   Data            &
   Question                     Review
                      Type                 Reviewers    Management
                               Schedule
                                                          System
SWPBS Appendices




         Appendix B

 Committee/Group/Team Self-
Assessment and Action Planning
SWPBS Appendices




        Committee/Group Self-Assessment& Action Planning

Purpose
      The purpose of this worksheet is to enable schools to assess and
enhance the efficiency, effectiveness, and relevance of the committee and team
organization of schools.


Challenge
        Whenever a new initiative is introduced to a school, district/region, or
state, the general approach is to “form a team/committee” to develop a plan for
implementation. Although this initiative might be a worthwhile implementation,
efforts often struggle because of a number of challenges:
   1.     Few resources, staff, time, etc.
   2.     Duplication of effort with other initiatives and efforts
   3.     Lack of clarity regarding purpose and outcomes
   4.     Lack of priority
   5.     Etc.


Addressing the Challenge
       To address these challenges, schools must examine the overall
organization and operation of its existing teams and committees. This self-
assessment has been designed to enable school staff and educational leaders to
take an inventory of its current committee and working group organization, and
make enhancements that would improve the effectiveness, efficiency, and
relevance with which the business and operation of the school are conducted.


Guiding Principles
      When conducting the self-assessment and developing the action plan,
keep and give highest priority to any groups that have
   1.     Data to support or justify their need and priority.
   2.     Measurable outcomes or objectives
   3.     Specification of their target audience
   4.     Alignment with the top school and/or district school-improvement goals
          or priorities
   5.     “Full” (>80%) commitment/agreement of the school staff
   6.     Priority and support from the administrative team
SWPBS Appendices




General Directions
   1.    Identify all committees, teams, groups, etc. that have social behavior
         improvement as part or all of their purpose.
   2.    Characterize the main features of each committee
         a. Purpose -Why was this group formed and why does it meet?
         b. Measurable expected outcomes/objectives- What kind and level
            of change, improvement, etc. is expected?
         c. Target audience - Who is expected to benefit from the efforts of
            this group?
         d. Meeting schedule - How often, when, and how long does this
            group meet?
         e. Membership - Who is on this committee or group?
         f. Relationship to school and/or district improvement goals - How do
            the efforts of this group relate to the short and long term priorities of
            the school or district?
         g. Priority or need - How important is this group to the school?
   3.    After conducting the self-assessment, evaluate how the committee
         organization of the school might be enhanced
         a. What can be eliminated?
         b. What can be combined?
         c. What might be added?
         d. What resources are needed to support this organizational
            structure?
   4.    Based on this new/enhanced organizational structure, develop an
         action plan for putting it in place.
SWPBS Appendices


                                  Committee/Group Self-Assessment
                                    (DRAFT Sugai, April 26, 2004)
                                                                          Relation to School
                                                                                                  Priority
Committee/             Expected       Target                               Mission & School
             Purpose                              Schedule   Membership                          (1 = low,
Work Group             Outcome       Audience                             Improvement Plan
                                                                                                 5 = high)
                                                                           (1 – low, 5 = high)


                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5




                                                                              1 2 3 4 5          1 2 3 4 5
SWPBS Appendices

                                           Recommendations

1.   What committees/work groups can we eliminate?



2.   What committees/work groups can we combine?



3.   What committees/work groups need to be supported for improved outcomes and sustained functioning?



4.   What would an organizational chart that shows the relationship between each of our recommended
     committees/work groups look like?
SWPBS Appendices

                                              Action Plan

5.   What needs to be done next to act on the above recommendations?

       What                  Who                     How               By When      Other
Working Smarter
  Initiative,       Purpose          Outcome             Target            Staff           SIP, SID,
   Project,                                              Group           Involved             etc
 Committee
Attendance
Committee
Character
Education
Safety
Committee
School Spirit
Committee
Discipline
Committee
DARE
Committee
EBS Work
Group




                                    Sample Teaming Matrix
  Initiative,      Purpose               Outcome              Target           Staff          SIP/SID
 Committee                                                    Group          Involved
Attendance       Increase           Increase % of           All students    Eric, Ellen,      Goal #2
Committee        attendance         students attending                      Marlee
                                    daily
Character        Improve            Improve character       All students    Marlee, J.S.,     Goal #3
Education        character                                                  Ellen
Safety           Improve safety     Predictable response    Dangerous       Has not met       Goal #3
Committee                           to threat/crisis        students

School Spirit    Enhance school     Improve morale          All students    Has not met
Committee        spirit
Discipline       Improve behavior   Decrease office         Bullies,        Ellen, Eric,      Goal #3
Committee                           referrals               antisocial      Marlee, Otis
                                                            students,
                                                            repeat
                                                            offenders
DARE             Prevent drug use                           High/at-risk    Don
Committee                                                   drug users
EBS Work Group   Implement 3-tier   Decrease office         All students    Eric, Ellen,      Goal #2
                 model              referrals, increase                     Marlee, Otis,     Goal #3
                                    attendance, enhance                     Emma
                                    academic
                                    engagement, improve
                                    grades
Appendix C

          Effective Behavior Support Self-
                 Assessment Survey

Go to http://www.pbis.org/tools.htm and click on “EBS Survey”
Appendix D

Team Implementation Checklist
Effective Behavior Support Team Implementation Checklists
                                          (Monthly)

School                                                                      Date of Report
DistrictCounty                                                                 State


INSTRUCTIONS: The EBS team should complete both checklists monthly to monitor activities for
implementation of EBS in the school.

EBS Team Members




Person(s) Completing Report

                                       Checklist #1: Start-Up Activity
                                                                  Status:Achieved, In Progress, Not Started
Complete & submitMonthly.
                                                         Date:
                                                     (MM/DD/YY)

             Establish Commitment
                                                       Status:
1. Administrator’s support & active involvement.

2. Faculty/Staff support (One of top 3 goals,
80% of faculty document support, 3 year                Status:
timeline).

          Establish & Maintain Team
                                                       Status:
3. Team established (representative).

4. Team has regular meeting schedule, effective
                                                       Status:
operating procedures.

5. Audit is completed for efficient integration of
team with other teams/initiatives addressing           Status:
behavior support.

                Self-Assessment
6. Team/faculty completes EBS self-assessment          Status:
survey.

7. Team summarizes existing school discipline
                                                       Status:
data.

8. Strengths, areas of immediate focus & action
                                                       Status:
plan are identified.
Establish School-wide Expectations
9. 3-5 school-wide behavior expectations are      Status:
defined.

10. School-wide teaching matrix developed.        Status:

11. Teaching plans for school-wide expectations
                                                  Status:
are developed.

12. School-wide behavioral expectations taught
                                                  Status:
directly & formally.

13. System in place to acknowledge/reward
                                                  Status:
school-wide expectations.

14. Clearly defined & consistent consequences
and procedures for undesirable behaviors are      Status:
developed.

        Establish Information System
15. Discipline data are gathered, summarized, &   Status:
reported.

 Build Capacity for Function-based Support
16. Personnel with behavioral expertise are       Status:
identified & involved.

17. Plan developed to identify and establish
systems for teacher support, functional
                                                  Status:
assessment & support plan development &
implementation.
Checklist #2: On-going Activity Monitoring

Complete & submit Monthly.                                    Status:Achieved, In Progress, Not Started

1. EBS team has met at least monthly.               Status:


2. EBS team has given status report to faculty at
                                                    Status:
least monthly.


3. Activities for EBS action plan implemented.      Status:


4. Accuracy of implementation of EBS action
                                                    Status:
plan assessed.

5. Effectiveness of EBS action plan
                                                    Status:
implementation assessed.


6. EBS data analyzed.                               Status:



Additional Observations/Comments/Questions:
Action Plan for Completion of Start-Up Activities


       Activity                       Activity Task Analysis                  Who   When
                          a


1. Establish              b.
   Commitment
   Administrator          c.
   Top 3 goal
   80% of faculty         d.
   Three year timeline

                          e.


                          a.

2. Establish Team
                          b.
   Representative
   Administrator
                          c.
   Effective team
   operating
   procedures             d.
   Audit of
   teams/initiatives
                          e.


                          a.
3. Self-Assessment
   EBS survey             b.
   Discipline data
   Identification of      c.
   strengths, focus
   Action Plan
                          d.
   developed
   Action Plan
   presented to faculty   e.
a.
4. School-wide
   Expectations
   Define 3-5 school-   b.
   wide behavioral
   expectations
                        c.
   Curriculum matrix
   Teaching plans
                        d.
   Teach expectations
   Define
   consequences for     e.
   problem behavior

                        a.
5. Establish
   Information
   System
                        b.
   System for
   gathering useful
   information          c.
   Process for
   summarizing
                        d.
   information
   Process for using
   information for      e.
   decision-making

                        a.
6. Build Capacity for
   Function-based
   Support              b.
   Personnel with
   behavioral
   expertise            c.

   Time and
   procedures for       d.
   identification,
   assessment, &
   support              e.
   implementation
Appendix E

SWPBS Team Monthly Planning Guide
SWPBS Team Monthly Planning Guide
                                        May 7, 2006 – Sugai3


                                  Purpose and Use Guidelines

      The purpose of this guide is to give SWPBS leadership teams a supplemental
organizational tool for reviewing and planning their implementation activities. A self-
assessment is provided to guide teams in their action planning. The following guidelines
should be considered:

    1.     Work as a school-wide leadership team.
    2.     Begin by reviewing current behavioral data4
    3.     Link all activities to measurable action plan outcomes and objectives.
    4.     Use “effectiveness, efficiency, and relevance” to judge whether an activity can
           be implemented with accuracy and sustained.
    5.     Use, review, update this planning guide at monthly team meetings.
    6.     Plan activities 12 months out.


                                               Definitions

                            Measurable outcomes, data-based decision making, evidence-based
                SWPBS:
                            practices, and implementation support systems

                            Group with stakeholder representation, school level status/priority, and
                  Team:
                            behavior leadership responsibility

                            Primary (“green”) prevention activities for all students, all staff, across all
      All Students/Staff:
                            school settings

                            Secondary (“yellow”) and tertiary (“red”) prevention activities for students
Students w/PBS Needs:       whose behavior support needs are more intensive than provided by primary
                            prevention activities.

                            Explicit activity that team and/or all staff will engage in and/or experience to
                Activity:
                            support all students and/or students w/PBS needs.




3
  OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports. Go to www.pbis.org or contact George
Sugai (george.sugai@uconn.edu) for additional information.
4
  E.g., discipline referrals, Team Implementation Checklist, EBS Self-Assessment, School-Wide
Evaluation Tool.
Self-Assessment to Planning Guide
School ________________________________ Date________________

                                                                                                           5
                                          STAFF (>80% of staff)                                   RATING
1.      State definition of SWPBS?                                                                F P N
2.      State purpose of SWPBS team?                                                              F P N
3.      State SW positive expectations?                                                           F P N
4.      Actively supervise in non-classroom settings?                                             F P N
5.      Agree to support SWPBS action plan?                                                       F P N
6.      Have more positive than negative daily interactions with students?                        F P N
7.      Have opportunities to be recognized for their SWPBS efforts?                              F P N


                                    STUDENTS (>80%)
8.      State SW positive expectations & give contextually appropriate behavior examples?         F P N
9.      Received daily positive academic and/or social acknowledgement?                           F P N
10.     Have 0-1 major office discipline referrals for year?                                      F P N
11.     Have secondary/tertiary behavior intervention plans if >5 major office referrals?         F P N


                                           TEAM
12.     Representative membership?                                                                F P N
13.     At least monthly meetings?                                                                F P N
14.     Active administrator participation?                                                       F P N
15.     Active and current action plan?                                                           F P N
16.     Designated coaching/facilitation support                                                  F P N


                                              DATA
17.     Measurable behavioral definitions for rule violations?                                    F P N
18.     Discipline referral or behavior incident recording form that is efficient and relevant?   F P N
19.     Clear steps for processing, storing, summarizing, analyzing, and reporting data?          F P N
20.     Schedule for monthly review of school-wide data?                                          F P N




5
    F = fully or >80% in place, P = partially in place, N = not in place or don’t know.
SW POSITIVE EXPECTATIONS
21.   Agreed to 3-5 positively stated SW expectations?                                           F P N
22.   Complete (behaviors, context, examples) lesson plan or matrix for teaching expectations?   F P N
23.   Schedule for teaching expectations in context to all students?                             F P N
24.   Schedule for practice/review/boosters of SW expectations?                                  F P N


              ENCOURAGING/ACKNOWLEDGING EXPECTATIONS                                             F P N
25.   Continuum or array of positive consequences?                                               F P N
26.   At least daily opportunities to be acknowledged?                                           F P N
27.   At least weekly feedback/acknowledgement?                                                  F P N


                                  RULE VIOLATIONS
28.   Leveled definitions of problem behavior?                                                   F P N
29.   Procedures for responding to minor violations (nonrecordable)?                             F P N
30.   Procedures for responding to minor (non-office referable, recordable) violations?          F P N
31.   Procedures for responding to major (office referable) violations?                          F P N
32.   Procedures for preventing major violations?                                                F P N
33.   Quarterly review of effectiveness of SW consequences for rule violations?                  F P N


                    NONCLASSROOM SETTINGS (>80% of staff)
34.   Active supervision by all staff across all settings?                                       F P N
35.   Daily positive student acknowledgements?                                                   F P N


                                     CLASSROOM SETTINGS
36.   Agreement about classroom and nonclassroom managed problem behaviors?                      F P N
37.   Linkage between SW and classroom positive expected behaviors?                              F P N
38.   High rates of academic success for all students?                                           F P N
39.   Typical classrooms routines directly taught and regularly acknowledged?                    F P N
40.   Higher rates of positive than negative social interactions between teacher and students?   F P N
41.   Students with PBS support needs receiving individualized academic & social assistance?     F P N


                           STUDENTS WITH PROBLEM BEHAVIORS
42.   Regular meeting schedule for behavior support team?                                        F P N
43.   Behavioral expertise/competence on team?                                                   F P N
44.   Function-based approach?                                                                   F P N
45.   District/community support?                                       F P N
46.   SW procedures for secondary prevention/intervention strategies?   F P N
47.   SW procedures for tertiary prevention/intervention strategies?    F P N
Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support…..
            All Students/Staff (“Green”)           Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”)
          Conduct SWPBS leadership team             Report to staff on status of students on
          meeting to review data and progress on    secondary and tertiary behavioral
          action plan activities, and plan new      intervention plans.
          activities, as needed.
          Report to staff on status of SWPBS.
Monthly




                                                    Review progress of students on
                                                    secondary and tertiary intervention plans
                                                    Nominate/review new students who might
                                                    need individualized PBS
                                                    Send parents progress report
Weekly




 Daily
Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support…..
              All Students/Staff (“Green”)           Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”)
          Conduct SWPBS leadership team               Report to staff on status of students on
          meeting to review data and progress on      secondary and tertiary behavioral
          action plan activities, and plan new        intervention plans.
          activities, as needed.
          Give report to staff on status of SWPBS.

Monthly




                                                      Review progress of students on
                                                      secondary and tertiary intervention plans
                                                      Nominate/review new students who might
                                                      need individualized PBS
                                                      Send parents progress report

Weekly




          U




 Daily
Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support…..
            All Students/Staff (“Green”)             Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”)
          Conduct SWPBS leadership team               Report to staff on status of students on
          meeting to review data and progress on      secondary and tertiary behavioral
          action plan activities, and plan new        intervention plans.
          activities, as needed.
          Give report to staff on status of SWPBS.

Monthly




                                                      Review progress of students on
                                                      secondary and tertiary intervention plans
                                                      Nominate/review new students who might
                                                      need individualized PBS
                                                      Send parents progress report
Weekly




 Daily
Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support…..
            All Students/Staff (“Green”)             Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”)
          Conduct SWPBS leadership team               Report to staff on status of students on
          meeting to review data and progress on      secondary and tertiary behavioral
          action plan activities, and plan new        intervention plans.
          activities, as needed.
          Give report to staff on status of SWPBS.

Monthly




                                                      Review progress of students on
                                                      secondary and tertiary intervention plans
                                                      Nominate/review new students who might
                                                      need individualized PBS
                                                      Send parents progress report
Weekly




 Daily
Appendix F

Detention and Suspension: Frequently
          Asked Questions
Detentions and Suspensions: Frequently Asked Questions

                            (Sugai, DRAFT May 28, 2002)
Purpose
       The purpose of this FAQ is to summarize the implementation features of
detention and suspension consequences. A question/answer format is used.


   1.     What are “detentions and suspensions” (D&S)?


          a. D&S are consequences given to students for displays of moderate and
             severe problem behavior.
                 i. Detentions typically are taken in in-school locations.
                ii. Suspensions typically are taken out-of-school.
          b. D&S consequences alone are NOT treatment interventions because more
             appropriate alternative behaviors are not emphasized.
                 i. However, they can be included as an element in a comprehensive
                    behavior support plan if supported by assessment information.
          c. D&S consequences are punishment if contingent use is associated with a
             decrease in probability of future occurrences of problem behavior.


   2.     Why are D&S used in schools?


          a. D&S are used to
                 i. Decrease likelihood of future occurrences (including escalations) of
                    serious or chronic problem behavior.
                ii. Inhibit or prevent future occurrences of serious or chronic problem
                    behavior by target students and their peers.
                iii. Encourage displays of appropriate behavior by all students.
                iv. Communicate seriousness of problem behavior to student and
                    peers.
                v. Allow instruction for others to continue.
          b. D&S are usually part of series of consequence events:
                 i. Labeling of behavior as a rule violation
                ii. Presentation of a verbal reprimand
iii. Involvement of multiple individuals, for example, student, parent,
                referring staff member, office staff, etc.


3.   How is effectiveness of D&S determined?


     a. Conduct regular review of data.
            i. #/% of students with (a) 1, (b) 2-4, and (c) 5 or more.
           ii. #/% by type of rule violations.
           iii. #/% by location.
     b. Strive toward
            i. Decreased occurrences of problem behaviors by target students
               are observed.
           ii. Decreased uses of D&S are seen across all students.
           iii. Increased student use of appropriate behaviors are observed.


4.   Are D&S the same as “timeout?”


     a. Timeout is the brief (3-10 minute) contingent (dependent on) removal of
        the opportunity to earn positive reinforcement that is associated with a
        decrease in future occurrences of a behavior.
            i. Brief removal of student from a reinforcing time-in to non-reinforcing
               timeout situation.
           ii. Decrease in future occurrences of behavior.
     b. See Timeout checklist for requirements for using timeout.
5.   What is required to increase the utility and impact of D&S?


     a. School-wide discipline/climate leadership committee meets regularly to
        review school climate and status of behavior, and effectiveness of
        strategies.
     b. Proactive school-wide and classroom-wide behavior support or discipline
        systems are in place.
            i. Desired expectations and behaviors are taught directly, actively and
               continuously supervised, and reinforced regularly and effectively.
           ii. >80% of staff are actively participating.
     c. Continuum of intensifying specialized behavior supports is in place.
            i. D&S is only an element of school-wide behavior support system.
     d. Measurable data decision rules are in place to assess effectiveness of
        D&S interventions.
     e. Maximum amount of time is allocated for instruction and high rates of
        academic success are experienced.
     f. Clear and consistent school-wide agreements exist about what problem
        behaviors are managed by administrative staff and classroom and other
        school staff.
            i. Including definitions of behaviors and criteria for earning D&S.
     g. Positive behavior support systems are in place, available, and
        implemented with high fidelity for students whose behaviors do not
        improve with D&S.


6.   If these requirements are in place, for whom would suspensions and
     detentions expect to have a desirable effect?


     a. >80% of students would respond favorably to the use and/or threat of
        D&S.
     b. ~20% of students will require more individualized and comprehensive
        interventions to inhibit problem and encourage desired behavior.


7.   What should be done for students who do not respond to D&S?


     a. Establish and refer to behavior support team with specialized behavioral
        skills.
b. Establish clear decision rules for discontinuing use with students whose
         behaviors do not improve with the application of D&S (e.g., 3 rd assignment
         of detention, refer to behavior support team)
      c. Conduct functional behavioral assessment to determine function (what
         maintains occurrence of problem behavior).
      d. Develop school-based individualized behavior support plan based on
         findings from functional behavioral assessment decisions and results.
      e. Consider need for supports from outside the school (e.g., district, mental
         health, social work, medical).


8.    How can use of D&S be culturally appropriate?


      a. Teach what behaviors are appropriate and inappropriate in school specific
         settings and context.
      b. When problem behavior occurs, determine whether these behaviors are
         supported and/or endorsed by students’ family, peers, and/or community.


9.    What steps should be followed to administer D&S consequences?


      a. State behavior displayed and rule violated.
      b. State and deliver specific features of detention or suspension
         consequence.
      c. Inform parents.
      d. Debrief after consequence completed
             i. See guidelines for conducting debriefing
      e. If indicated, develop proactive behavior support plan.
      f. Document all above steps.


10.   How should D&S be conducted?


      a. Supervisor should behave in a business-like, objective, non-reinforcing
         manner.
      b. Students should not be allowed to interact socially with students or adults.
      c. Students should not receive instructional assistance.
      d. Activities should be non-interactive, mundane.
e. If student displays disruptive behaviors and is noncompliant to corrections,
   next planned consequence step should be followed.
f. If student occurrences of problem behavior do not decrease (data decision
   rule), discontinue use of D&S and conduct behavior support team
   meeting.
Selected References
American Academy of Pediatrics (2003). Out-of-school suspension and expulsion:
      Policy statement. Pediatrics, 11(5), 1200-1206.
American Academy of Pediatrics, Task Force on Violence (1999). The role of the
      pediatrician in youth violence prevention in clinical practice and at the community
      level. Pediatrics, 13, 173-181.
Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (1999). The dark side of zero tolerance: Can punishment
       lead to safe schools? Phi Delta Kappan, 80, 372-382.
Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (2000). School discipline at a crossroads: From zero
       tolerance to early response. Exceptional Children, 66, 335-347.
Skiba, R. J., Peterson, R. L., & Williams, T. (1997). Office referrals and suspensions:
       Disciplinary intervention in middle schools. Education and Treatment of Children,
       20, 295-315.
University of California Los Angeles, Center for Mental Health in Schools. Mental Health
      in Schools Web site. Available at:
      http://smhp.psych.ucla.edu/aboutmhinschools.htm.
Wolery, M. R., Bailey, D. B., Jr., & Sugai, G. M. (1988). Effective teaching: Principles
      and procedures of applied behavior analysis with exceptional students. Boston,
      MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Appendix G

Functional Assessment and Behavior
      Support Plan Checklists
Functional Behavioral Assessment Implementation Checklist6

     Step                                              Activity                    Status               Action Plan

                                       1. Include key individuals in the initial
                                                                                   Y   N
       1. Collect Information




                                       assessment meetings.

                                       2. Review relevant records.                 Y   N

                                       3. Collect informal direct observation
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       data.

                                       3. Interview individuals who have
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       direct experience with the student.

                                       1. Define problem behavior in
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       observable terms.
       2. Develop Summary Statement




                                       2. Identify triggering antecedents
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       events.

                                       3. Identify maintaining consequence
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       events.

                                       4. Identify possible setting events.        Y   N

                                       5. Develop summary statements
                                                                                   Y   N
                                       based on 1. – 4.
                                       6. Determine level of                                If agreement/confidence high, go to
                                       agreement/confidence individuals have       Y   N    Step 3.
                                       in resulting summary statement.                      If low, go back to Step 1.

                                       1. Collect formal direct observation
    3. Confirm

    Statement
     Summary




                                       information on behavior, antecedents,       Y   N
                                       & consequences.
                                                                                            If summary statement confirmed, go
                                       2. Determine if direct observation data
                                                                                   Y   N    to Step 4.
                                       confirm summary statement.
                                                                                            If not confirmed, go back to Step 2.




6
 3-10-04. Adapted from Sugai, G., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Hagan-Burke, S. (1999-2000). Overview of the
functional behavioral assessment process. Exceptionality, 8, 149-160.
1. Identified desired replacement
4. Develop Competing Behavior
                                                                                   Y   N
                                         behavior (long term objective).

                                         2. Identify common reinforcing
      Pathway Summary



                                         consequences for desired replacement      Y   N
                                         behavior.
                                         3. Identified alternative replacement
                                         behavior(s) based on function of
                                                                                   Y   N
                                         problem behavior (short term
                                         objectives).

                                         4. Determine level of                             If agreement/confidence high, go to
                                         agreement/confidence in competing         Y   N   Step 5.
                                         pathway summary.                                  If low, repeat Step 4.

                                         1. Select strategies &/or
                                         environmental manipulations that          Y   N
                                         neutralize impact of setting events.

                                         2. Select strategies &/or
        5. Identify Strategies for BIP




                                         environmental manipulations that          Y   N
                                         make triggering antecedents irrelevant.

                                         3. Select strategies &/or
                                         environmental manipulations that
                                                                                   Y   N
                                         teach student skills that make problem
                                         behavior inefficient.
                                         4. Select strategies &/or
                                         environmental manipulations that
                                                                                   Y   N
                                         make consequences for problem
                                         behavior ineffective.

                                         5. If necessary, develop additional
                                         (beyond current school-wide) crisis       Y   N
                                         prevention & intervention procedures.

                                         1. Develop scripts & routines for
                                                                                   Y   N
                                         implementation of BIP.
Implementation
Scripts for BIP




                                         2. Identify who will implement BIP.       Y   N
6. Develop




                                                                                           If capacity adequate, implement.
                                                                                           If resources/capacity inadequate,
                                         3. Determine if resources & capacity
                                                                                   Y   N   obtain resources, modify context,
                                         to implement BIP available.
                                                                                           &/or adjust implementation
                                                                                           requirements.
1. Identify measures to assess impact:
                          (a) target behaviors, (b) social         Y   N
                          validation, (c) lifestyle, etc.
7. Develop Evaluation &
Monitoring Procedures


                          2. Develop schedule for on-going
                                                                   Y   N
                          evaluation of implementation impact.

                          3. Develop procedures for assessing
                                                                   Y   N
                          accuracy of implementation of BIP.
                                                                           If adequate progress, continue.
                          4. Assess progress toward achieving              If criteria met, develop new objective.
                                                                   Y   N
                          long term objective.                             If inadequate progress, go back to
                                                                           Step 1.
Checklist for Assessing Quality of Behavior Support Planning:
                                                                       7
                         Does Plan and Process Have These Features?

1. ____ Definition of academic and lifestyle context for behavior support
2. ____ Operational/observable/measurable description of problem behaviors
3. ____ Identification of problem routines
4. ____ Statements of hypotheses based on functional assessment information
5. Descriptions of Interventions & Supports that Consider Quality of Life
        ____      Health and physiology
        ____      Communication
        ____      Mobility
        ____      Predictability
        ____      Control/choice
        ____      Social relationships
        ____      Activity patterns
6. Descriptions of Preventive Interventions that Make Problem Behavior Irrelevant
        ____      Physical environment
        ____      Schedule
        ____      Curriculum
        ____      Instructional procedures
7. Descriptions of Instructional &Teaching Interventions that Make Problem Behavior Inefficient
        ____      Replacement skills
        ____      New adaptive skills
8. Descriptions of Consequence-based Interventions that Reduce Likelihood of Problem Behavior
        ____      Minimization of positive reinforcement to make problem behavior ineffective (extinction)
        ____      Minimization of negative reinforcement to make problem behavior ineffective
                  (extinction)
        ____      Maximization of positive reinforcement to make appropriate behavior more effective
                  (reinforcement)
        ____      If needed, aversive consequences contingent upon problem behavior (punishment)
        ____      Safety/emergency intervention plan for occurrences of severe problem behaviors
9. Descriptions of Evaluation & Assessment Procedures
        ____      Definition of information to be collected
        ____      Description of measurement process
        ____      Description of decision-making process
10. Descriptions of Procedures to Consider & Enhance Contextual Fit
        ____      Values & beliefs of participants
        ____      Skill capacity & fluency of implementers
        ____      Availability of supporting resources
        ____      Administrative support system
        ____      Plan in best interest of student



7
 3-10-04 Adapted from Horner, R., Sugai, G., Todd, A., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (1999-2000). Elements of
behavior support plans. Exceptionality, 8(3), 205-216
Appendix H

Functional Assessment Checklist for
    Teachers and Staff (FACTS)
Appendix I

Emergency Prevention and Response
PRIMER ON CRISIS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSES

                             (Sugai & Colvin, February 23, 1999)



       Although relatively infrequent events, crisis/emergency situations will occur in
school settings and all school personnel should be prepared to respond efficiently and
quickly. All crisis/emergency situations involve or have the potential for injury and/or
property damage. Examples crisis/emergency situations include the following:




                         Crisis/Emergency Situation Examples

                   1.     Stranger in the building

                   2.     Bomb/weapon threat

                   3.     Natural disaster

                   4.     Fire/smoke

                   5.     Wild animal

                   6.     Medical emergency

                   7.

                   8.

                   9.

                   10.

                   11.
Guiding Principles

        When developing, implementing, and practicing responses to crisis/emergency
situations, the following guiding principles should be maintained:




 1.    Safety is the number one consideration. Crisis/emergency responses are
       not “teachable moments.” However, every effort should be made to reduce the
       likelihood of future crisis/emergency situations, and if they occur, emphasis
       should be focused on decreasing their impact.

 2.    Escalations are likely to run their course, and are inversely related to self-
       control.When and as individuals escalate, they are less and less likely to
       respond to efforts (external or internal) to stop or brake their behavior. The
       danger is further escalating an event by trying to intervene.

 3.    Planned responses and debriefing are required after crisis/emergency.
       School staff must provide follow-up supports to individuals who were involved
       directly and indirectly in a crisis/emergency event. This support may be
       information dissemination, emotional supports, administering consequences,
       etc. In all cases, the focus is on facilitating a smooth and speedy return to
       regular routines and structures.

 4.    Prosocial responses must be relevant, effective, efficient, and taught.
       With individuals or situations in which crisis/emergency situations are likely,
       more prosocial or acceptable alternative responses must be taught to and
       practiced by all individuals ahead of time. Persons involved in crisis/emergency
       situations must be taught alternatives to dangerous or unacceptable behaviors.
       These alternatives can be used to reduce the impact, intensity, and duration of
       the crisis/emergency situation. Selecting the prosocial response should be
       based on a functional assessment of the context (setting, antecedent triggers,
       maintaining consequences, early behavioral indicators, etc.) in which
       crisis/emergency situations are likely.

 5.    Practice...Practice…Practice. Responses to crisis/emergency situations are
       not easy or natural, especially, when individuals or situations are out-of-control.
       School personnel must practice crisis/emergency responses on a regular (e.g.,
       monthly basis) to ensure accurate and fluent implementation.
Prerequisites

        To minimize the impact of crisis/emergency situations and to maximize the
effectiveness and efficiency of the response, schools should have the following
prerequisites in place:




 1.    A comprehensive, positive behavior support system enables schools to
       develop and sustain a predictable, preventive, and positive environment in
       which communications and interactions among staff and students are effective
       and efficient. As a result schools are better prepared to respond when
       crisis/emergency situations occur.

 2.    A crisis response teamhas two functions: (a) insure that a structures and
       procedures for maintaining a safe school are in place and practiced and (b)
       lead staff response in the event of a crisis/emergency.

 3.    Strong home-school-community linkages enhance the development and
       responsiveness of school crisis/emergency procedures. When all significant
       agents (school staff, students, parents, law enforcement and emergency
       personnel, administrators, mental health workers, etc.) are informed, involved,
       and prepared, crisis/emergency responses can be more efficient and effective.

 4.    High rates of student academic and social successpromotes prosocial
       personal and interpersonal behavior and self-confidence. As a result, the
       likelihood and impact of crisis/emergency situations can be reduced, and the
       response is likely to be more efficient and effective.

 5.    Clearly written policy and procedures increases understanding,
       communications, and accountability. In addition, responses to crisis/emergency
       situations can be more efficient and effective.

 6.    Regular, supervised opportunities to practicecrisis/emergency responses
       are absolutely essential. With practice, staff and students are more likely to
       respond accurately, quickly, and without hesitation.
A Generic Response Sequence

        Although the behavioral appearance of each step will vary for different
crisis/emergency situations, the following response sequence should serve as the basis
for responses to all crisis/emergency situations.




 1.    Assessthe situation. Collect information about who is involved, where the
       problem is, what is happening, etc.

 2.    Request help/assistance. Always work with another person or team of
       individuals.

 3.    Monitor/defuse/control crowd. Respond as a team, and let individuals with
       crisis/emergency training and practice take over.

 4.     Let help/experts take over. Give them necessary information, and assist as
       required.

 5.    Follow-up. Debrief immediately. Focus on reviewing and evaluating the event,
       reducing impact of event, facilitating transitions, and preparing plans to reduce
       possibility and/or impact of future events.
Other Provisions

       In addition to the above generic sequence, the following provisions should be
established:



 1.    “Safe” areas or locations where individual or groups should gather or
       evacuate to when a crisis/emergency occurs.

 2.    Clear roles and responsibilities for key personnel who respond to
       crisis/emergency situations.

 3.    Clear, “fool-proof” communications systems so information can be distributed
       or obtained quickly, accurately, and with high reliability.

 4.    Means of securing immediate external support from essential community
       agencies (e.g., paramedics, fire personnel, law enforcement, poison control).

 5.    Procedures for securing or “locking down” a classroom or school to isolate
       students and staff from dangerous situations or individuals.

 6.    Instructions for unique situations which require specific responses beyond
       the generic sequence (e.g., handling blood, poisoning or drug abuse, chemical
       spills).

 7.    Procedures for accounting for whereabouts of all students and staff.

 8.    Procedures for documenting dangerous and potentially dangerous situations.
Process for School Investigations
                               (Sugai, March 19, 1998)

        When significant events occur, information gathering and action planning
typically follow. These investigations are important to insure accurate documentation,
consistent communications, and informed decision-making.

        Like the process for responding to crisis/emergency situations, investigations
should be conducted in a planned, systematic, and business-like manner. In addition,
environments that have clear written policies and operate with proactive
(positive/preventative) procedures are more likely to conduct effective and efficient
investigations.

       The following generic steps should be considered when conducting
investigations:

                                          Steps

 1.    Assess for injuries, property damage, potential for danger to self or others, or
       other safety concerns.

 2.    Insure accountability by (a) checking policies and procedures and (b)
       consulting with experts.

 3.    Inform others of investigation: (a) parents, (b) schools, (c) agencies, etc.

 4.    Interview key players by (a) informing them of their rights, obligations,
       privileges; (b) requesting information; (c) giving choices; and (d) establishing
       and following-through with bottom line.

 5.    Follow through with (a) consequences and (b) actions.

 6.    Follow up by (a) documenting the event and (b) debriefing with primary
       participants.
School Crisis/Emergency Response Checklist and Action Planning8
                                             (Sugai, February 23, 1999)

 Date of Assessment: _________________

 Person(s) Completing Assessment: _________________________________________
 _____________________________________________________________________

 Check status of each item (in place, partially in place, not in place).

        In Place Status

Fully      Partially      Not                                        Item

                                  1.   Crisis response team

                                  2.   Home-school-community linkage

                                  3.   Proactive school-wide discipline system

                                  4.   High rates of academic & social success

                                  5.   Clear written policy & procedures

                                  6.   Regular, supervised opportunities to practice

                                  7.   Posted generic response sequence

                                  8.   Designated safe areas

                                  9.   Clear roles & responsibilities of key personnel

                                  10. Clear fool-proof communication system

                                  11. Means of securing immediate external support

                                  12. Procedures for securing or locking down classroom or school

                                  13. Posted instructions for unique situations

                                  14. Procedures for accounting for whereabouts of all students & staff

                                  15. Systematic process for conducting investigations

                                  16. Clear policy on physical interventions

                                  17. Procedures for documenting dangerous & potentially dangerous
                                      situations




           8
               Complete checklist at least quarterly.
School Crisis/Emergency Response Action Plan

1. Overall status                           High     Medium Low

                      a.


                      b.
2. List three major
strengths
                      c.



3. List three major   a.
   areas in need of
   improvement
                      b.

4. Circle the area
   most in need of    c.
   improvement


                      Step 1:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________


                      Step 2:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________


                      Step 3:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________
5. Develop an
   Action Plan for
   circled area       Step 4:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________


                      Step 5:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________


                      Step 6:                                     Who:________________
                                                                  When:_______________



6. Schedule next
                      Who:________________________                When: _______________
   self assessment
References
Carr, E. G., Levin, L., McConnachie, G., Carlson, J. L., Kemp, D. C., & Smith, C.
       E. (1994). Communication-based intervention for problem behavior: A
       user’s guide for producing positive change. Baltimore, MD: Brookes.
Dwyer, K., Osher, D., & Warger, C. (1998). Early warning, timely response: A
      guide to safe schools. Washington, DC: US Department of Education.
Furlong, M. J., & Morrison, G. M. (1994). School violence and safety in
      perspective. School Psychology Review, 23, 139-261.
Goldstein, A. P., Palumbo, J., Striepling, S., & Voutsinas, A. M. (1995).Break it
      up: A teacher=s guide to managing student aggression. Champaign, IL:
      Research Press.
Schneider, T., Walker, H., & Sprague, J. (2000). Safe school design: A handbook
      for educational leaders.ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Management.
      University of Oregon, Eugene.
Stephens, R. D. (1995). Safe schools: A handbook for violence prevention.
      Bloomington, IN: National Educational Service.
Sprague, J. R., Colvin, G., Irvin, L. K., & Stieber, S. (1997). The Oregon School
      Safety Survey. Institute on Violence and Destructive Behavior at the
      University of Oregon, Eugene.
Walker, H., Colvin, G., & Ramsey, E. (1995). Antisocial behavior in public school:
      Strategies and best practices. Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole.
Walker, H., Irvin, L., & Sprague, J. K. (1998). Violence prevention and school
      safety: Issues, problems, approaches, and recommended solutions.
      Oregon School Study Council, 41(1), 1-20.
Watson, R. S., Poda, J. H., Miller, C. T., Rice, E. S., & West, G. (1990).
     Containing crisis: A guide to managing school emergencies. Bloomington,
     IN: National Educational Service.
Appendix J

Social Skills Lesson Planning
Teaching Social Skills: Strategies and Examples

                               George Sugai & Brandi Simonsen

                                 University of Connecticut
                       Center for Behavioral Education and Research
                                     August 10, 2008



                                  SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN


                                         INSTRUCTIONS

Develop a social skills lesson by completing the following steps:

    1. Start with your completed the Expected Behavior Matrix.

    2. Choose 1 expected behavior and 1 routine (i.e., 1 box within the matrix).

    3. Describe how you would teach the expected, rule-following behavior(s) by completing
        the attached lesson plan for teaching 1 expectation within 1 routine.
Social Skill Lesson Plan

                                  Name of Expectation (Rule)




                                           Routine




              Operational Definition of Expected Behavior Within Specific Routine




                         Clearly Stated Behavioral Teaching Objective
                             learner, behavior, conditions, criteria)

Conditions:

Learner:

Behavior:

Criteria:


                          List All Materials Required to Teach Lesson




                                      Teaching Examples
              Positive Examples                                Negative Examples
Getting Started Appendices may 14_2010
Lesson Activities
                         Model
(Demonstrating expected behavior within indicated routine)




                          Lead
             (Prompting and guided practice)




                          Test
      (Checking for understanding for each student)
Follow-Up Activities During and After Lesson
           Prompting Expected Behavior




         Reinforcing Appropriate Behavior




         Correcting Inappropriate Behavior




Monitoring and Actively Supervising Student Behavior




  Collecting Data and Evaluating Student Behavior
SUPPORT Social Skill Lesson Plan (Sample)

                               NAME OF EXPECTATION (RULE)
Be Respectful

                                           ROUTINE
Classroom

       OPERATIONAL DEFINITION OF EXPECTED BEHAVIOR WITHIN SPECIFIC ROUTINE
Students show respect in the classroom by raising their hands before speaking, encouraging
and allowing peers to participate, and accepting feedback.

                   CLEARLY STATE BEHAVIORAL TEACHING OBJECTIVE(S)
              Include 4 parts: learner(s), behavior(s), condition(s), and criteria
  Immediately following instruction, students will be able to (a) describe what respectful
  classroom behavior “looks like” and (b) correctly depict a positive example of respectful
  classroom behavior (in a skit) with 95% accuracy.
  Following instruction, during five sampled teacher directed activities, students will raise
  their hands and wait to be called to ask or answer a question on an average of 90% of
  opportunities.
  Following instruction, during five sampled group activities, students will encourage and
  allow peers to participate (as evidenced by all students contributing to discussion and
  group outcomes) across 85% of opportunities.
  Following instruction, when staff members present feedback, students will use calm
  language to thank the staff and ask questions on 80% of opportunities across 5 days.

                     LIST ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO TEACH THE LESSON
  A script for role plays for three students to model respectful classroom behavior
  Two response cards for each student, one with a + written on it and one with a – written
  on it
  A blank script for each student that prompts them to write the definition of respectful
  classroom behavior on the front and develop a skit to illustrate respectful classroom
  behavior inside
  Data collection sheets to monitor and evaluate student behavior following instruction

        POSITIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES                        NEGATIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES
  When a teacher is sharing information, Jorge        A teacher is delivering a lesson, and Jen
  quietly raises his hand and waits for the           stands up and shouts out, “I don’t get
  teacher to call on him before asking a              it.” When the teacher says, “Jen raise
  relevant question.                                  your hand if you have a question,” Jen
                                                      screams louder.
  During a group activity, Jessica asks her peers     Toby is assigned to a group with three
  what they think about her suggestion. When          classmates. He immediately shouts that
  one peer doesn’t respond, she specifically          he doesn’t want Brian in his group.
  asks that peer for feedback.                        When Brian sits down, Toby refuses to
POSITIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES                       NEGATIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES
                                                       work with Brian.
  Jeff’s teacher tells him that his paper was          Teresa’s teacher asks her to correct a
  well organized, but he needs to go back and          math problem on her homework
  correct spelling errors. Jeff says thank you,        assignment. Teresa rolls her eyes and
  gets a dictionary, and starts working.               throws her paper away as she walks
                                                       back to her desk.
  When Bobbi is reminded to raise her hand             When the teacher asks Diane to walk
  instead of talking out, she calmly raises her        slowly on her way to line up, Diane
  hand and waits to be called on to share her          continues to walk very quickly (fast
  response.                                            enough that she’s almost jogging) to the
                                                       front of the line.
  When the teacher explains the roles that             As the teacher is giving instructions for
  each group member may play, Marco listens            group work, Charles is looking around
  quietly. When she joins her peers in the             the room and making eye contact with
  group, she asks who wants to play which role         peers he wants in his group. When they
  in the group and engages her peers in a              sit down, he doesn’t know what roles
  conversation to choose roles.                        each person should take, but he tells
                                                       everyone, “I’m the leader.”

                                      LESSON ACTIVITIES
                                               MODEL
   (Indicate how you will demonstrate rule following behavior within the indicated routine)
Before teaching the lesson, the teacher will coach three students who have positive social
status to engage in three brief role plays that demonstrate respectful classroom behavior
during three classroom activities: teacher directed instruction (i.e., raising hand to ask a
question), during group work (i.e., asking all peers for their opinion), and when accepting
feedback (i.e., saying thank you).
                                                LEAD
                         (Indicate how you will provide guided practice)
The teacher will read and briefly act out each positive and negative example. All students will
be asked to identify whether the example is positive or negative (by holding up a response
card with a + or a – written on it). If the example is positive, individual students will be asked
to identify how the example illustrated respectful classroom behavior. If the example is
negative, the students will be asked to state how the student should have behaved in that
situation.
                                                TEST
              (Indicate how you will check for the understanding of each student)
Each student will be asked to write a brief skit that demonstrates respectful classroom
behavior. Then, students will be given a blank script booklet that prompts them to write the
definition of respectful classroom behavior on the front and then write the script for the skit
inside. The teacher will review the scripts and choose the best skits for the class to act out
the following day during a review session.
FOLLOW UP ACTIVITIES (DURING AND AFTER THE LESSON)
                                  PROMPTING EXPECTED BEHAVIOR
   Before each classroom activity, the teacher will provide a specific verbal prompt about how
   students can show respect during that activity (e.g., before teacher directed instruction, the
   teacher will say, “To show respect, remember to raise your hand to ask or answer a
   question.”)
   Rules will also be posted within the classroom (a visual prompt).
                               REINFORCING APPROPRIATE BEHAVIOR
   When a student successfully demonstrates respectful classroom behavior, the teacher will
   provide specific and contingent praise (e.g., the teacher may say, “Thank you for showing
   respect by raising your hand.”)
   Also, for each specified period of time students demonstrate respectful classroom behavior,
   students will earn points toward their class-wide token economy.
                              CORRECTING INAPPROPRIATE BEHAVIOR
   If a student does not demonstrate respect, the teacher will provide an error correction (e.g.,
   “Before you share, please raise your hand and wait for me to call on you. Try again.”)
   If a student continues to make the same behavioral error, the teacher will provide additional
   instruction in how to demonstrate respect.
                          MONITORING/SUPERVISING STUDENT BEHAVIOR
   The classroom teacher and staff will actively supervise students across classroom activities.
   They will take data to determine if students are meeting behavioral objectives.
    o For a period of five days following the lesson, the teacher will take data during a sample
         of teacher directed activities (by making a tally next to each student who raises his/her
         hand and calls out) to determine if students raise their hand on 90% of opportunities.
    o For five days following instruction, the teacher will take data during a sample of group
         activities and note which students participate (and provide specific feedback to students
         who are encouraging their peers to participate) to determine if all students are
         participating during 85% of opportunities.
    o For five days following instruction, the teacher will track how students respond each
         time they are presented with feedback to determine if students accept feedback
         appropriately (saying thank you and calmly asking questions) on 80% of opportunities.
   If needed, the teacher will assign staff to posts in the classroom and map out walking paths to
   ensure that staff are moving around, scanning the environment, and interacting with
   students (the three behaviors involved in active supervision).
                           COLLECTING AND EVALUATING STUDENT DATA
Data will be summarized across days and students. If students meet criteria specified in
instructional objectives (as described in the previous section), the teacher will continue to
actively supervise students and reinforce respectful behavior. If students do not meet criteria,
the teacher will re-teach the lesson using different examples and increase reinforcement for
respectful behavior.
GENERIC SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN
                                (Sugai, May 15, 2002)

Name of Skill:



                      Teacher Wording                         Examples
Cumulative Review:



Introduction (Outcome):



Skill Components/Variations (behaviors):



Model/Show:



Role Play/Practice:



Review:



Test:



Homework:



Next Lesson:
GENERIC SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN: EXAMPLE
                                    (Sugai, 5/15/02)


Name of Skill:Conflict Management: Stop, Think, & Act

                  Teacher Wording                                       Examples

Cumulative Review:                                       + Two students want to use the same
                                                         computer.
   Yesterday, we began to learn about a conflict
   management strategy called Stop, Think, & Act.        + Student and teacher have different
   Before we could learn the strategy we had to          answers.
   define “conflict.” What is a conflict? (when two or
                                                         + Child and parent want to watch
   more people disagree about something)
                                                         different tv shows.
                                                         + Two students disagree about a
                                                         game rule

Introduction (Outcome):
   Today, we are going to learn the first step in the
   Stop, Think, & Act strategy….Stop.

Skill Components/Variations (behaviors):                 + Take a deep breathe
   After you have determined that a conflict exists,     + Say “I think we don’t agree.”
   there are many different ways to Stop…some of
                                                         - Call the other person an arguer
   them are okay and others are not okay.
                                                         + Ask to discuss later
   Can you give some examples of correct ways to
   Stop?                                                 + Ask an adult to help
                                                         - Throw something
                                                         -/+ Walk away without saying
                                                         anything
                                                         + Others?

Model/Show:                                              + Two students want to use the same
                                                         computer (Say: We both want to use
   Watch me. When I’m done, I’ll ask you to tell me
                                                         the same computer at the same time.
   how I stopped when there was a conflict.
                                                         We have a conflict.)
                                                         + Student and teacher have different
                                                         answers. Ask the teacher for correct
                                                         answer.
Role Play/Practice:                                        + Child and parent want to watch
                                                           different tv shows.
   Now it’s your turn to show how to Stop when you
   discover that a conflict exists. What was the           + One student accidentally bumps
   conflict? How did you Stop?                             another students causing juice to spill
                                                           on floor. Neither student wants to pay
                                                           for the juice.
                                                           + Two students disagree about
                                                           whether a foul was committed during
                                                           a game.

Review:
   So, what have we learned so far?
   + Three steps for managing a conflict are Stop,
   Think, & Act
   + A conflict is a disagreement between two people,
   + The first step is to Stop before you Act, and there
   are many ways to Stop.

Test:                                                      + You and another student want the
                                                           last desert in the cafeteria.
    Here are some new examples. Describe what the
    conflict is, and tell/show me how you would stop in    + You say that you finished your
    each of these situations.                              assignment and the teacher says that
                                                           you didn’t.
                                                           + You say that another student left
                                                           the door unlocked. The other student
                                                           says you left it unlocked.

Homework:
   Read a story or watch a tv show. Identify when two Worksheet
   people are having a conflict. If they stopped the
   correct way, describe how. If they didn’t Stop the
   correct way, describe how they could have stopped
   correctly.

Next Lesson:
   The next time we meet, we will review your
   homework findings, and we will learn about how to
   Act after you Stop.
Teaching Social Skills at the Large Group Level: “Cool Tool of the Week”


                                            George Sugai
                                        University of Oregon
                                           Eugene, Oregon
                                                 and
                                  Kathy Giesen and Betsy Fernandez
                                        Shasta Middle School
                                        Bethel School District
                                           Eugene, Oregon


The Cool Tool is a social skills training format used to teach school-wide and classroom level
behavioral expectations or rules. The following material includes examples that were developed
and used at Shasta Middle School to improve student social behaviors.
TO:              All Shasta Middle School Staff
FROM:            Special Services Team
RE:              Social skill of the week (A.k.a.: Cool Tool of the Week)
DATE:            March 4, 1996
Overview and Purpose
         In an effort to improve the social skills of all students at Shasta Middle School, the EBS
and special services teams have developed a two pronged approach to school-wide social skills
instruction. The first prong involves the systematic and comprehensive training of our school-
wide rules and expectations. We will be proposing some activities to try this year and a larger-
scale implementation at the beginning of next year. Information about this activity is
forthcoming, and will involve an intensive and school-wide effort.
         The purpose of this note is to describe the second prong which is less formal but focuses
on the use of brief tactics for addressing specific problem behaviors. We will focus on teaching
and encouraging kids (a) how to get adult or peer attention (e.g., instead of using harassment,
disruptions, and arguing), (b) how to get help for difficult tasks and responsibilities (e.g., instead
of displays of acting out and noncompliance to escape work), and (c) how to succeed in the
classroom (e.g., instead of being late, unprepared, or absent). This activity will be called “Cool
Tool of the Week” and will have the following features:
        A brief strategy to promote a specific social skill (i.e., “Cool Tool”) will be e-mailed to
        each staff member every other Monday morning. A hardcopy also will be distributed.
        The description of the strategy will include (a) the name of the Cool Tool, (b) a set of
        examples that illustrate the Cool Tool, (c) a recommended activity for discussing the
        Cool Tool, and (d) a list of strategies for promoting the Cool Tool throughout the day.
        All staff will be asked to assist us by spending 15 or so minutes at the beginning of each
        week to present the Cool Tool lesson, and to give positive attention to kids who display
        the Cool Tool throughout the day and week.
        The special services team and building administrators will assume responsibility for
        regularly reminding staff to implement the Cool Tool lessons and strategies and
        acknowledging staff participation and success.
        The special services team will be available to co-present lessons, or to assist in the
        development of other supporting activities.
        This approach is designed to assist the majority of students in classrooms...it will take
        more to assist kids with more chronic problem behaviors. Also, we must remember that
        many kids have the Cool Tool, but require extra practice and feedback to encourage
        more use of the Cool Tool at the correct times and places.
        The special services team will assume responsibility for encouraging staff members to
        share successful materials and examples and for collecting and organizing this
        information.
Cool Tools

        The following is a sample of the skills that we are thinking about developing into lessons.
A draft of the first Cool Tool of the Week lesson also is attached. Please let us know if you have
other skills that you would like to have included.

        Getting Help (how to ask for assistance on difficult tasks) (draft attached)
        Buddy Builders (how to get attention from peers)
        Teacher Attention (how to get attention from adults)
        Being There (how to get to class on time)
        Being Ready (how to be ready for class activities)
        Getting There (how to get to school on time)

General Teaching Strategies

         Regardless of the Cool Tool being taught, you can increase the effectiveness and
efficiency of your lessons by incorporating the following teaching strategies into your
interactions with students:
        Focus on the presentation of positive examples of the use of a Cool Tool.Avoid spending
        too much time on inappropriate behaviors and the negative consequences for those
        behaviors.
        When a student displays inappropriate behavior, give attention to other students who
        are engaged in appropriate use of Cool Tool.
        Whenever possible, use positive examples from your own classroom and school
        experiences to illustrate the application of a Cool Tool.
        Throughout the day, focus on giving positive feedback to kids who display the Cool Tool.
        Positive feedback might consist of social attention, positive office referral, verbal praise,
        extra privilege, and the like.
        If the student has never displayed the Cool Tool behavior (i.e., doesn’t “know” how),
        provide teacher demonstrations or models of the tool, use multiple examples of the
        tool, and provide lots of opportunities for the student to practice the tool.
        If the student has displayed the Cool Tool behavior but not at the right times, in the
        right places, or at high enough rates, arrange opportunities for the student to use the
        Cool Tool, and be sure to provide positive acknowledgements when the tool is used.
        The Cool Tool strategy is designed for the general student body....not the individual
        student with severe problem behavior. So, avoid basing the success or failure of the
        Cool Tool strategy on the response of the student who displays the most severe
        problem behavior.
COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK


                                       Skill Name

                                      Getting Help
                          (How to ask for assistance for difficulty tasks)

                                  Teaching Examples

1.   When you’re working on a math problem that you can’t figure out, raise your hand
     and wait until the teacher can help you.
2.   You and a friend are working together on a science experiment but you are missing
     a piece of lab equipment, ask the teacher for the missing equipment.
3.   You are reading a story but you don’t know the meaning of most of the words, ask
     the teacher to read and explain the word.

                                      Kid Activity

1.   Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they needed help to
     complete a task, activity, or direction.
2.   Ask students to indicate or show how they could get help.
3.   Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for
     inappropriate responses.

                                    After the Lesson
                                    (During the Day)

1.   Just before giving students difficult or new task, direction, or activity, ask them to
     tell you how they could get help if they have difficulty (precorrection).
2.   When you see students having difficulty with a task (e.g., off task, complaining), ask
     them to indicate that they need help (reminder).
3.   Whenever a student gets help the correct way, provide specific praise to the
     student.
COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK
                                      Skill Name

                                      Teacher Attention
                               (how to get attention from adults)

                                  Teaching Examples

1.   You want to let the teacher know that you are done with your in-class social studies
     assignment, so you go to the teacher’s desk and ask the teacher to check your
     answers.
2.   Your group is done with its art activity and you’d like to ask the teacher for
     permission to visit the library, so you raise your hand. When the teacher sees your
     raised hand, the teacher asks what you want. You say your group is done with their
     project and would like permission to go the library.
3.   You are walking down the hall with your friends and you see one of your teachers.
     When you get close to the teacher, you say “hi” and introduce your friends.
4.   Your teacher is talking to another teacher before school. You want to ask your
     teacher about an assignment. You stand within view so your teacher knows you are
     waiting.
                                     Kid Activity
1.   Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they wanted attention
     from an adult.
2.   Ask students to indicate or show how they could get attention from an adult.
3.   Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for
     inappropriate responses.
                                   After the Lesson
                                   (During the Day)
1.   Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to
     tell you how they could get your attention (precorrection).
2.   When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get your attention, wait
     until they are quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get your
     attention (reminder).
3.   Whenever a student gets your attention the correct way, provide specific praise to
     the student.
COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK


                                       Skill Name

                                     Buddy Builders
                           (how to get attention from peers)

                                   Teaching Examples

1.   Your best friend is talking to two other kids. You want to talk to him, so you wait for a
     break in their conversation, and you say your friend’s name.
2.   You are done with your written work and are getting bored. You wait until your friend
     is done with hers written work, and say “what’s happening?”
3.   Everyone is listening to a student tell about a recent music concert. You want to say
     that you went to the same concert, so you look for someone who isn’t listening to the
     student, and begin telling her about the concert.

                                       Kid Activity

1.   Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they wanted attention
     from a peer/kid.
2.   Ask students to indicate or show how they could get attention from a peer/kid.
3.   Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for
     inappropriate responses.

                                    After the Lesson
                                    (During the Day)

1.   Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell
     you how they could get attention from a peer/kid (precorrection).
2.   When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get your attention, wait until
     they are quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get attend from a
     peer/kid (reminder).
3.   Whenever a student gets attention from a peer/kid the correct way, provide specific
     praise to the student.
SKILL OF THE WEEK


                                       Skill Name

                                      Being Ready
                          (how to be ready for class activities)

                                   Teaching Examples

1.   Class is about ready to begin, you get out the materials you will need for your first
     assignment. Before you sit down or visit with your friends, you collect your binder,
     pencil, and book.
2.   The teacher gives you a break between math and science; so you go to your locker or
     open your bag and get out the book, folder, journal, or whatever you need for the
     next class. After getting ready, you visit with your friends.
3.   You have all the things you will need from your bag to complete your work, so you put
     your bag on the floor to give you more space on your desk.

                                       Kid Activity

1.   Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they need to be ready for
     class activities.
2.   Ask students to indicate or show how they could get ready for a class activity.
3.   Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for
     inappropriate responses.

                                    After the Lesson
                                    (During the Day)

1.   Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell
     you how they could get ready for the next class or activity (precorrection).
2.   When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get ready, wait until they are
     quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get ready for that class or
     activity (reminder).
3.   Whenever a student gets ready for a class or activity the correct way, provide specific
     praise to the student.
“COOL TOOL”Review Activity

    TO:         Shasta Middle School Staff

 FROM:          Kathy, John, Betsy, and Susan

     RE:        Review Activity for Cool Tool

  DATE:         May 17, 1996


         We are pleased with everyone’s efforts to enhance student awareness about the
importance of social skills at Shasta Middle School. Students are discussing “Cool Tools” with us,
we have been able to incorporate “Cool Tools” in our discussions with students who have
displayed problem behaviors, and we have seen staff integrating “Cool Tools” into their daily
activities.

        To date, four social skills (a.k.a. “Cool Tools”) have been introduced: Getting Help,
Getting There, Asking for Help, Teacher Attention

        Rather than introducing a new skill on Monday (5/20), we thought it would be helpful to
have a fun review activity. We call it the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day.” In general, students will
be asked to guess the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day” based on hints provided by staff. Here are
the details:
        On Monday 5/20 you will receive the name of the Mystery Cool Tool. Do NOT tell any
        student the name of the skill.
        During the first period of the day (5/20), read/tell the students the following (5
        minutes):

                  Today we are going to play a game to help us review what we have learned
                  so far, called the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day,” All staff members know
                  what the Cool Tool is, and will acknowledge you when they see the skill being
                  used....but they won’t name the skill. Your job is to figure out which skill is
                  the “Mystery Tool of the Day.”

                  Tomorrow morning, we’ll have a short class discussion, and decide what we
                  think the mystery skill is. We’ll submit this name to the office. I’ve heard that
                  the office will provide some kind of special acknowledgment for those
                  classrooms that guess correctly.
Data Dec 82



          Throughout the day in your classroom, in the hallways, in the cafeteria, etc., look for
          kids who display the “Mystery Cool Tool,” and acknowledge that you saw it. For
          example, you might say the following: (a) That was it...I saw you doing the Mystery Cool
          Tool of the Day! (b) Cool Tool, right there! and (c) You did it! Hmmm, I wonder what
          Mystery Cool Tool that was? Do NOT name the skill, just acknowledge its occurrence.
          We will be out acknowledging students and asking them if they have any idea about
          what the skill might be.
          During the first period of the next day (5/21), ask students to (a) nominate what they
          believe was the Mystery Skill of the Day, (b) describe where they were and what they
          were doing at the time, and (c) arrive at a consensus (or vote) for one nomination that
          can be sent to the office. After a choice has been made, have one of your students
          deliver the class nomination to the office on the form below.


Thank you, in advance, for you efforts and participation.




--------------------------------------------Tear along line----------------------------------------------------

                                  “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day:” Nomination Form

Date __________________                               Teacher’s Name ______________________
House __________________________                      Classroom ___________

          We believe that the Mystery Cool Tool of the Day is _____________________________.

Teacher’s Signature: _______________________________

Student Representative Signature: _________________________
Data Dec 83




        Appendix K

SWPBS and Responsiveness to
       Intervention
Data Dec 84


      School-Wide Positive Behavior Support and Response to Intervention
           by George Sugai, Ph.D. University of Connecticut, Storrs
         OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports
               Center for Behavioral Education and Research

Schools are complex environments where the collective skills, knowledge, and
practices of a culture are taught, shaped, encouraged, and transmitted. Teachers
are challenged to provide effective and explicit instruction that maximizes
students’ acquisition of concepts, skills, and information, and students are
challenged to remain attentive, responsive, and engaged to benefit from these
instructional opportunities. These formidable goals are enriched and complicated
by learners with diverse learning histories, unique strengths and limitations, and
defining cultural influences. In addition, schools, families, and students
continually must adapt to maximize benefits from the school experience.

In recent years, achieving these goals has required that schools a) increase
instructional accountability and justification, b) improve the alignment between
assessment information and intervention development, c) enhance use of limited
resources and time, d) make decisions with accurate and relevant information, e)
initiate important instructional decisions earlier and in a more timely manner, f)
engage in regular and comprehensive screening for successful and at-risk
learners, g) provide effective and relevant support for students who do not
respond to core curricula, and g) enhance fidelity of instructional implementation
(Sugai, 2007).

In response, a general problem-solving framework, Response to Intervention
(RTI), has evolved to address these need statements. Although not new or
limited to special education, RTI initially appeared as policy in the Individuals with
Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004 (IDEA 2004), and it has
conceptual and empirical foundations in, for example, applied behavior analysis,
curriculum-based measurement, precision teaching, pre-referral intervention,
teacher assistance teaming, diagnostic prescriptive teaching, data-based
decision making, early universal screening and intervention, behavioral and
instructional consultation, and team-based problem solving (Sugai, 2007). RTI
has been described as an approach for establishing and redesigning teaching
and learning environments so that they are effective, efficient, relevant, and
durable for all students, families, and educators (Sugai, 2007). Specifically, RTI is
shaped by six defining characteristics (Brown-Chidsey & Steege, 2005; Christ,
Burns, & Ysseldyke, 2005; Fuchs & Deschler, 2007; Fuchs & Fuchs, 2007;
Fuchs, Mock, Morgan, & Young, 2003; Gresham, 2005; Gresham et al., 2005;
Kame’enui, 2007; National Association of State Directors of Special Education,
2006; Severson, Walker, Hope-Doolittle, Kratochwill, & Gresham, 2007):

   1. Universal screening: Learner performance and progress should be
      reviewed on a regular basis and in a systematic manner to identify
      students who are a) making adequate progress, b) at some risk of failure if
Data Dec 85


        not provided extra assistance, or c) at high risk of failure if not provided
        specialized supports.
   2.   Data-based decision making and problem solving: Information that
        directly reflects student learning based on measurable and relevant
        learning criteria and outcomes should be used to guide decisions
        regarding instructional effectiveness, student responsiveness, and
        intervention adaptations and modifications.
   3.   Continuous progress monitoring: Student progress should be assessed
        on a frequent and regular basis to identify adequate or inadequate growth
        trends and support timely instructional decisions.
   4.   Student performance: Priority should be given to using actual student
        performance on the instructional curriculum to guide decisions regarding
        teaching effectiveness and learning progress.
   5.   Continuum of evidence-based interventions: An integrated and linked
        curriculum should be available such that:
            a. A core curriculum is provided for all students;
            b. A modification of this core is arranged for students who are
                identified as nonresponsive, and
            c. A specialized and intensive curriculum is developed for students
                whose performance is deemed nonresponsive to the modified core.
                Elements of this continuum must have empirical evidence to
                support efficacy (intervention is linked to outcome), effectiveness
                (intervention outcomes are achievable and replicable in applied
                settings), relevant (intervention can be implemented by natural
                implementers and with high fidelity), and durable (intervention
                implementation is sustainable and student outcomes are durable).
   6.   Implementation fidelity: Team-based structures and procedures are in
        place to ensure and coordinate appropriate adoption and accurate and
        sustained implementation of the full continuum of intervention practices.

Although most RTI implementation efforts have focused on academic curriculum
and instructional practices (e.g., early literacy and numeracy), applications of the
RTI framework also are represented in the implementation of School-wide
Positive Behavior Support (SWPBS) practices and systems (Sugai et al., 2000).
A comparison of RTI applications in early literacy and social behavior reveals
similarities within core RTI characteristics (see Figure 1).
Data Dec 86




Figure 1: Comparison of RTI in Literacy and Social Behavior
SOURCE: Sugai, G., (August 1, 2007). School-wide positive behavior support
and responsiveness-to-intervention. Keynote presentation to and paper for the
Southern Maryland PBIS Summer Regional Conference. Waldorf, MD. Reprinted
with permission.

A particularly important feature of SWPBS and RTI is an emphasis on prevention
(see Figure 2), which has its roots in public health and disease control and
occurs at three levels:

   1. Primary tier prevention: All students are exposed to a core social behavior
      curriculum to prevent the development of problem behavior and to identify
      students whose behaviors are not responsive to that core.
   2. Secondary tier prevention: Supplemental social behavior support is added
      to reduce the current number and intensity of problem behavior.
   3. Tertiary tier prevention: Individualized and intensive behavior support is
      developed to reduce complications, intensity, and/or severity of existing
      problem behavior.

This three-tiered prevention logic has direct application to both academic and
social behavior supports (Kame’enui, 2007; Lane et al., 2007; O'Shaughnessy,
Lane, Gresham, & Beebe-Frankenberger, 2003; Sadler & Sugai, 2009).
Data Dec 87




Figure 2: Integration of Academic and Social Behavior Three-Tiered Continuum
of Behavior Support
SOURCE: Sugai, G. (June 23, 2001). School climate and discipline: School-wide
positive behavior support. Keynote presentation to and paper for the National
Summit on Shared Implementation of IDEA. Washington, DC. Reprinted with
permission.

Although conceptualized as a three-tiered framework, this continuum of
evidence-based practices of RTI and SWPBS applications is best represented as
a blended integration that has relevance and application across the range of
teaching and learning environments that exist in schools and communities. In
Figure 3, examples of specific school-based behavioral interventions are
organized in the traditional three-tiered framework but also are aligned along this
integrated curriculum. If done properly, each practice should have decision rules
for determining movement up and down the continuum based on student
performance. The specialized nature of interventions and breadth of the
continuum will vary by developmental level (e.g., early childhood/preschool,
elementary, middle, high school), environmental constraints (e.g., small vs. large
school), alternative programming (e.g., correctional school, hospital setting), and
so on. For example, an intensive program for students with significant emotional
and behavioral disorders might have a structured level system and token
economy for all students that involves hourly social behavior progress monitoring
and feedback associated with school-wide social skills (primary tier); a peer- or
adult-based individualized behavioral contracting system with continuous
prompting, monitoring, and feedback (secondary tier); and cognitive-behavioral
counseling sessions every morning that are linked to psychopharmacological and
person-centered process planning (tertiary tier).
Data Dec 88




Figure 3: Integrated Continuum of Positive Behavior Support With Intervention
Examples
SOURCE: Sugai, G. (2007, December). Responsiveness-to-intervention:
Lessons learned and to be learned. Keynote presentation at and paper for the
RTI Summit, U.S. Department of Education, Washington, D.C. Reprinted with
permission.

Although applications of the RTI logic and SWPBS approach seem
straightforward, research (Christ et al., 2005; Fairbanks, Sugai, Guardino, &
Lathrop, 2007; Fuchs & Deschler, 2007; Gresham, 2005; Klingner & Edwards,
2006; Sandomierski, Kincaid, & Algozzine, 2007) has shown that school
personnel need to continually rethink their practices in a number of areas.

   1. How curriculum adoptions and instructional design decisions are made;
   2. How special and general educators work together to address the needs of
      all students;
   3. What assessment tools and procedures are used to make reliable and
      valid instructional decisions;
   4. How high fidelity of implementation of best practices is assessed,
      evaluated, and supported;
   5. What communications among students, teachers, and families look like;
   6. How resources are organized to respond effectively and efficiently with
      students who do not achieve the desired outcomes in response to the
      intervention;
   7. What criteria are used to determine whether a practice is evidence based;
   8. How the practices and systems align with the social, cultural, and
      educational vision and values of students, family members, and school
      staff.
Data Dec 89


In conclusion, RTI is a good framework and logic for organizing and increasing
the efficiency with which evidence-based practices are selected, organized,
integrated, implemented, and adapted. Examples and applications of the RTI
logic are being developed, demonstrated, and tested in a number of academic
content areas and in social behavior supports. As represented in SWPBS, RTI
gives priority to the continuous monitoring of important student performance
indicators in response to high-fidelity implementation of evidence-based
practices. Timely screening and data-based decisions are encouraged so that
more effective and efficient interventions can be provided for students whose
behaviors are not responsive to core practices and interventions. Preventing the
development and lessening the intensity of problem behavior must be a high
priority of instructors seeking to maximize student learning and the impact of
effective interventions. If done wisely in the context of other initiatives and
interventions across classroom and nonclassroom settings, the possibility of
improving student academic and social behavior outcomes can become a reality
for all students.
                                   References
Brown-Chidsey, R., & Steege, M. W. (2005). Response to intervention: Principles
    and strategies for effective practice. New York: Guildford Press.
Christ, T. J., Burns, M. K., & Ysseldyke, J. E. (2005). Conceptual confusion within
     response-to-intervention vernacular: Clarifying meaningful differences.
     Communique, 34(3), 1–8.
Fairbanks, S., Sugai, G., Guardino, D., & Lathrop, M. (2007). Response to
     intervention: Examining classroom behavior support in second grade.
     Exceptional Children, 73, 288–310.
Fuchs, D., & Deschler, D. D. (2007). What we need to know about
    responsiveness to intervention (and shouldn’t be afraid to ask). Learning
    Disabilities Research & Practice, 22, 129–136.
Fuchs, D., & Fuchs, L. S. (Eds.). (2007). Responsiveness to intervention [Special
    issue]. Teaching Exceptional Children, 39(5).
Fuchs, D., Mock, D., Morgan, P. L., & Young, C. L. (2003). Responsiveness-to-
    intervention: Definitions, evidence, and implications for the learning
    disabilities construct. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 18(3), 157–
    171.
Gresham, R. M. (2005). Response to intervention: An alternative means of
    identifying students as emotionally disturbed. Education and Treatment of
    Children, 28, 328–344.
Gresham, F. M., Reschly, D. J., Tilly, W. D., Fletcher, J., Burns, M., Prasse, D.,
    et al. (2005). A response to intervention perspective. The School
    Psychologist, 59(1), 26–33.

     Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004, Pub. L. No.
     108-446, § 1400 et seq.
Data Dec 90


Kame’enui, E. J. (2007). A new paradigm: Responsiveness to intervention.
   Teaching Exceptional Children, 39(5), 6–7.
Klingner, J. K., & Edwards, P. A. (2006). Cultural considerations with response to
     intervention models. Reading Research Quarterly, 41, 108–117.
Lane, K. L., Rogers, L. A., Parks, R. J., Weisenbach, J. L., Mau, A. C., Merwin,
    M. T., & Bergman, W. A. (2007). Function-based interventions for students
    who are nonresponsive to primary and secondary prevention efforts:
    Illustrations at the elementary and middle school levels. Journal of
    Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 3, 169–184.
National Association of State Directors of Special Education. (2006, May). Myths
     about response to intervention (RtI) implementation. Retrieved May 2007,
     from
     http://www.nasdse.org/Portals/0/Documents/Download%20Publications/Myt
     hs%20about%20RtI.pdf.
O’Shaughnessy, T. E., Lane, K. L., Gresham, F. M., & Beebe-Frankenberger, M.
    E. (2003). Children placed at risk for learning and behavioral difficulties:
    Implementing a school-wide system of early identification and intervention.
    Remedial and Special Education, 24(1), 27–35.
Sadler, C., & Sugai, G. (in press). Effective behavior and instructional support: A
    district model for early identification and prevention of reading and behavior
    problems. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions.
Sandomierski, T., Kincaid, D., & Algozzine, B. (2007). Response to intervention
    and positive behavior support: Brothers from different mothers or sisters
    with different misters? Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports
    Newsletter, 4(2), 1–4.
Severson, H. H., Walker, H. M., Hope-Doolittle, J., Kratochwill, T. R., & Gresham,
    F. M. (2007). Proactive, early screening to detect behaviorally at-risk
    students: Issues, approaches, emerging innovations, and professional
    practices. Journal of School Psychology, 45, 193–223.
Sugai, G. (2007, December). Responsiveness-to-intervention: Lessons learned
    and to be learned. Keynote presentation at and paper for the RTI Summit,
    U.S. Department of Education, Washington, DC.
Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., Dunlap, G., Hieneman, M., Lewis, T. J., Nelson, C. M.,
    et al. (2000). Applying positive behavior support and functional assessment
    in schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 131–143.
The development of this article was supported in part by Grant H029D40055
from the Office of Special Education Programs, U.S. Department of Education.
Opinions expressed herein are the author's and do not necessarily reflect the
position of the U.S. Department of Education or the RTI Action Network, and
such endorsements should not be inferred. George Sugai may be contacted at
the OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports.
Data Dec 91




    Appendix L

Selected References
Data Dec 92




                               Selected PBS Related References
                                   Compiled by George Sugai
                                           May 9, 2010
Adelman, H. S. (1998). Reframing mental health in schools and expanding school reform.
         Educational Psychologist, 33 , 135-152.
Alberto, P. A. (2005). Applied behavior analysis for teachers (6th Ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
         Merrill/Prentice-Hall.
Albin, R. W., Lucyshyn, J. M., Horner, R. H., & Flannery, K. B. (1996). Contextual fit for
         behavioral support plans: A model for “goodness of fit.” In L. Koegel, R. Koegel, & G.
         Dunlap (Eds.), Positive behavioral support: including people with difficult behavior in the
         community (pp. 81-96). Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes.
Algozzine, B., Daunic, A. P., & Smith, S. W. (2010). Preventing problem behaviors: Schoolwide
                                                 nd
         programs and classroom practices (2 ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.
American Psychological Association. (1994). Violence and youth: Psychology’s response.
         Washington, D. C.: Author.
Anderson, A. R., Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., & Lehr, C. A. (2004). Check & Connect: The
         importance of relationships for promoting engagement with school. Journal of School
         Psychology, 42(2), 95-113.
Anderson, C. M., & Freeman, K. A. (2000). Positive behavior support: Expanding the application
         of applied behavior analysis. Behavior Analyst, 23(1), 85-94.
Anderson, C. M., & Kincaid, D. (2005). Applying behavior analysis to school violence and
         discipline problems: Schoolwide positive behavior support. Behavior Analyst, 28, 49-63.
Anderson, C. M., Spaulding, S. A. (2007). Using positive behavior support to design effective
         classrooms. Beyond Behavior, 16(2), 27-31.
Barrett, S., Bradshaw, C., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (in press). Maryland state-wide PBIS initiative.
         Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions.
Bear, G. G. (1990). Best practices in school discipline. In A. Thomas & J. Grimes (Eds.), Best
         practices in school psychology-II (pp. 649-663). Washington, DC: National Association of
         School Psychologists.
Beard-Jordan, K., & Sugai, G. (2004). First Step to Success: An early intervention for elementary
         children at risk for antisocial behavior. Behavioral Disorders, 29, 396-409.
Benazzi, L., Horner, R. H., & Good, R. H. (2006). Effects of behavior support team composition
         on the technical adequacy and contextual fit of behavior support plans. Journal of Special
         Education 40(3), 160-170.
Biglan, A. (1995). Translating what we know about the context of antisocial behavior in to a lower
         prevalence of such behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 28, 479-492.
Blair, K.C., Umbreit, J., Dunlap, G., & Jung, G. (in press). Promoting inclusion and peer
         participation through assessment-based intervention. Topics in Early Childhood Special
         Education.
Borgmeier, C., & Horner, R.H. (2006). An evaluation of the predictive validity of confidence
         ratings in identifying accurate functional behavioral assessment hypothesis statements.
         Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions 8(2), 100-105.
Bradshaw C., Leaf, P., et al, (in progress) Randomized control trial of secondary and tertiary
         interventions added to schools already using primary prevention efforts.
Blonigen, B. A., Harbaugh, W., Singell, L., Horner, R. H., Irvin, L. K., & Smolkowski, K. (2008).
         Application of economic analysis to school-wide positive behavior support programs.
         Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 5-19.
Bohanon, H., Fenning, P., Carney, K., Minnis, M., Anderson-Harriss, S., Moroz, K., Hicks, K.,
         Kasper, B., Culos, C., Sailor, W., & Piggott, T. (2006).School-wide application of positive
         behavior support in an urban high school: A case study. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 8(3), 131-145.
Bradley, M. R. (2001). Special issue - Positive behavior supports: Research to practice. Beyond
         Behavior, 11(1), 3-26.
Data Dec 93


Bradshaw, C., Leaf, P., & Debnam, K. (2007) Project Target: a presentation at the Maryland State
         SWPBS Conference.
Brooks, A., Todd, A. W., Tofflemoyer, S., & Horner, R. H. (2003). Use of functional assessment
         and a self-management system to increase academic engagement and work completion.
         Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 5, 144-152.
Broussard, C. D., & Northrup, L. (1995). An approach to functional assessment and analysis of
         disruptive behavior in general education classrooms. School Psychology Quarterly, 10,
         151-164.
Burke, M. D., Hagan-Burke, S., & Sugai, G. (2003). The efficacy of function-based interventions
         for students with learning disabilities who exhibit escape-maintained problem behavior:
         Preliminary results from a single case study. Learning Disabilities Quarterly, 26, 15-25.
Cameron, J., Banko, K. M., & Pierce, W. E. (2001). Pervasive negative effects of rewards on
         intrinsic motivation: The myth continues. The Behavior Analyst, 24(1), 1-44.
Carnine, D. (1997). Bridging the research-to-practice gap. Exceptional Children, 63, 513-521.
Carnine, D. (1995). Trustworthiness, useability, and accessibility of educational research. Journal
         of Behavioral Education, 5, 251-258.
Carr, E. G., Dunlap, G., Horner, R. H., Koegel, R. L., Turnbull, A. P., & Sailor, W. (2002). Positive
         behavior support: Evolution of an applied science. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 4, 4-16.
Carr, E. G., Horner, R. H., Turnbull, A. P., Marquis, J. G., Magito-McLaughlin, D., McAtee, M. L.,
         et al. (1999). Positive behavior support for people with developmental disabilities: A
         research synthesis. American Association on Mental Retardation Monograph Series.
         Washington, D. C.: American Association on Mental Retardation.
Carter, D.R. & Horner, R.H. (in press). Adding functional behavioral assessment to First Step to
         Success: A case study. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions.
Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports. (2004). School-wide positive behavior
         support: Implementers’ blueprint and self-assessment. Eugene, OR: University of
         Oregon.
Chafouleas, S., Riley-Tillman, C., Sassu, K., LaFrance, M., Patwa, S., (2007) Daily behavior
         report cards: An investigation of the consistency of on-task data across raters and
         methods. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. 9(1), 30-37.
Chaney, D., et al., (in progress). Randomized control trial of Check-in/ Check-out procedures.
Christenson, S., & Carroll, E. B. (1999). Strengthening the family-school partnership through
         Check and Connect. In E. Frydenberg (Ed.), Learning to cope: Developing as a person in
         complex societies, (pp. 248-273) London: Oxford University Press.
Christenson, S. L., & Havsy, L. H. (2004). Family-school-peer relationships: Significance for
         social-emotional and academic learning.In J. E. Zins, R. P. Weissberg, M. C. Wang, & H.
         J. Walberg (Eds.), Building academic success on social and emotional learning:
         What does the research say? (pp. 59-75) New York: Teachers College Press.
Christenson, S. L., Hurley, C. M., Hirsch, J. A., Kau, M., Evelo, D., & Bates, W. (1997). Check
         and Connect: The role of monitors in supporting high-risk youth. Reaching Today’s
         Youth: The Community Circle of Caring Journal, 2(1), 18-21.
Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., Lehr, C. A., & Hurley, C. M. (2000). Promoting successful
         school completion. In D. Minke & G. Bear (Eds.), Preventing school problems—
         Promoting school success: Strategies and programs that work. Bethesda, MD:
         National Association of School Psychologists.
Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., Thurlow, M. L., & Evelo, D. (1999). Promoting student
         engagement with school using the Check & Connect model.Australian Journal of
         Guidance & Counselling, 9(1), 169-184.
Christenson, S. L., & Thurlow, M. L. (2004). School dropouts: Prevention considerations,
         interventions, and challenges. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 13(1),
         36-39.
Data Dec 94


Cohen, R., Kincaid, D., & Childs, K. (in press). Measuring school-wide positive behavior support
         implementation: Development and validation of the “Benchmarks of Quality.” Journal of
         Positive Behavior Interventions.
Colvin, G., & Fernandez, E., (2000). Sustaining effective behavior support systems in an
         elementary School. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4), 251-253.
Colvin, G., Kameenui, E. J., & Sugai, G. (1993). School-wide and classroom management:
         Reconceptualizing the integration and management of students with behavior problems
         in general education. Education and Treatment of Children, 16, 361-381.
Colvin, G., & Lazar, M. (1997). The effective elementary classroom: Managing for success.
         Longmont, CO: Sopris West.
Colvin, G., Sugai, G., Good, R., & Lee, Y. (1997). Effect of active supervision and precorrection
         on transition behaviors of elementary students. School Psychology Quarterly,12, 344-
         363.
Colvin, G., Sugai, G., & Kam’eenui, E. (1994). Curriculum for establishing a proactive school-wide
         discipline plan: Project PREPARE. Eugene, OR: Behavioral Research and Teaching,
         College of Education, University of Oregon.
Colvin, G., Sugai, G., & Patching, W. (1993). Pre-correction: An instructional strategy for
         managing predictable behavior problems. Intervention in School and Clinic, 28, 143-150.
Comer, J. P. (2004). Leave no child behind: Preparing today’s youth for tomorrow’s world. Yale
         University Press.
                                                                                    nd
Cooper, J. O., Heron, T. E., & Heward, W. L. (2007). Applied behavior analysis (2 ed.).
         Pearson. Upper Saddle River, NY.
Cotton, K. (1995). Effective schooling practices: A research synthesis, 1995 update. Northwest
         Educational Laboratories. Portland, Oregon.
Cregor, M. (Fall 2008). The building blocks of positive behavior. Teaching Tolerance, Issue 34,
         18-21.
Crone, D., Hawken, L., & Bergstrom, M., (2007). A demonstration of training, implementing and
         using functional behavioral assessment in 10 elementary and middle school settings.
         Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 9(1). 15-29.
Crone, D. A., & Horner, R. H. (2003). Building positive behavior support systems in schools:
         Functional behavioral assessment. New York: Guildford Press.
Crone, D. A., Horner, R. H., & Hawken, L. S. (2004). Responding to problem behavior in schools:
         The behavior education program. New York: Guilford Press.
Darch, C. B., & Kameenui, E. J. (2003). Instructional classroom management: A proactive
                                                 nd
         approach to behavior management. (2 ed.). White Plains, NY: Longman.
De Pry, R. L., & Sugai, G. (2002). The effect of active supervision and precorrection on minor
         behavioral incidents in a sixth grade general education classroom. Journal of Behavioral
         Education, 11, 255-267.
Dootlitte, J., & Horner R., (2007). Sustaining school-wide positive behavior support. Manuscript
         in preparation.
Drasgow, E., Yell, M. L., Bradley, R., & Shriner, J. G. (1999). The IDEA amendments of 1997: A
         school-wide model for conducting functional behavioral assessments and developing
         behavior intervention plans. Education and Treatment of Children, 22, 244-266.
Drasgow, E., & Yell, M. L. (2002). School-wide behavior support: Legal implications and
         requirements. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 129-145.
Duchnowski, A. J., Kutash, K., & Romney, S., (2006). Voices from the field: A blueprint for
         schools to increase involvement of families who have children with emotional
         disturbances. Tampa, FL: University of South Florida, The Louis de la Parte Florida
         Mental Health Institute, Department of Child and Family Studies.
Duda, M. A., Dunlap, G., Fox, L., Lentini, R., & Clarke, S. (2004). An experimental evaluation of
         positive behavior support in a community preschool program. Topics in Early Childhood
         Special Education, 24(3), 143-155.
Eber, L. (1996). Restructuring schools through wraparound planning: The LADSE experience. In
         R. J. Illback & C. M. Nelson (Eds.), School-based services for students with emotional
         and behavioral disorders (pp. 139-154). Binghamton, NY: Haworth Press.
Data Dec 95


Eber, L., & Nelson, C. M. (1997). School-based wraparound planning: Integrating services for
          students with emotional and behavioral needs. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 67,
          385-395.
Epstein, M. H., Kutash, K., & Duchnowski, A. (Eds.) (1998). Outcomes for children and youth with
          emotional and behavioral disorders and their families: Programs and evaluation best
          practices. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.
Epstein, M. H., & Walker, H. M. (2002). Special education: Best practices and First Step to
          Success. In B. J. Burns & K. Hoagwood (Eds.), Community treatment for youth:
          Evidence-based interventions for severe emotional and behavioral disorders (pp. 179-
          197). New York: Oxford University Press.
Evans, S. W., Weist, M. D., & Serpell, Z. N. (Eds.), Advances in school-based mental health
          interventions: Best practices and program models. Kingston, NJ: Civic Research Institute.
Fairbanks, S., Sugai, G., Guardino, D., & Lathrop, M. (2007). Response to intervention:
          Examining classroom behavior support in second grade. Exceptional Children, 73, 288-
          310.
Fanning, P., Theodos, J., Benner, C., & Bohanon-Edmonson, H. (2004). Integrating proactive
          discipline practices into codes of conduct. Journal of School Violence, 3(1), 45-61.
Filter, K. J., McKenna, M. K., Benedict, E. A., Horner, R. H., Todd, A. W., & Watson, J. (2007).
          Check in/ Check out: A post-hoc evaluation of an efficient, secondary-level targeted
          intervention for reducing problem behaviors in schools. Education and Treatment of
          Children, 30, 69-84.
Fixsen, D. L., Naoom, S. F., Blase, K. A., Friedman, R. M., & Wallace, F. (2005). Implementation
          Research: A Synthesis of the Literature. (FMHI Publication #231). Tampa, FL: Florida
          Mental Health Institute, The National Implementation Research Network.
Fox, L., Dunlap, G., & Benito, N. (2001). Vincent’s story: From Head Start to fourth grade. Beyond
          Behavior, 11(1), 5-6.
Fox, L., Dunlap, G., & Powell, D. (2002). Young children with challenging behavior: Issues and
          considerations for behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 4, 208-
          217.
Frankland, H. C., Edmonson, H., & Turnbull, A. P. (2001). Positive behavioral support: Family,
          school, and community partnerships. Beyond Behavior, 11(1). 7-9.
Franze, K., Kamps, D. (2008). The utilization and effects of positive behavior supports strategies
          on an urban school playground. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10(3),150-
          161.
Galloway, R., Panyon, M., Smith, C., & Wessendorf, S., (in press). Systems change with school-
          wide positive behavior support: Iowa’s work in progress.Journal of Positive Behavior
          Interventions.
George, H. P., & Kincaid, D. K. (2008). Building district-level capacity for positive behavior
          support. Journal of Behavior Interventions, 10, 20-32.
Golly, A., Sprague, J., Walker, H. M., Beard, K., & Gorham, G. (2000). The First Step to Success
          program: An analysis of outcomes with identical twins across multiple baselines.
          Behavioral Disorders, 25(3), 170-182.
Golly, A., Stiller, B., & Walker, H. M. (1998). First Step to Success: Replication and social
          validation of an early intervention program. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral
          Disorders 6(4), 243-250.
Gottfredson, D.C. (1997). School-based crime prevention. In L. Sherman, D. Gottfredson, D.
          Mackenzie, J. Eck, P. Reuter, & S. Bushway (Eds.), Preventing crime: What works, what
          doesn't, what's promising. (Chapter 5, pp. 1-47) College Park, MD: Department of
          Criminology and Criminal Justice.
Gottfredson, D.C. (1987). An evaluation of an organization development approach to reducing
          school disorder. Evaluation Review, 11, 739-763.
Gottfredson, G. D., & Gottfredson, D. C. (1996). A national study of delinquency prevention in
          schools: Rationale for a study to describe the extensiveness and implementation of
          programs to prevent adolescent problem behavior in schools. Ellicott City, MD:
          Gottfredson Associates, Inc.
Data Dec 96


Gottfredson, D.C., Gottfredson, G.D., & Hybl, L.G, (1993). Managing adolescent behavior: A
        multiyear, multischool study. American Educational Research Journal, 30, 179-215.
Gottfredson, D.C., Gottfredson, G.D., & Skroban, S. (1996). A multimodel school based
        prevention demonstration. Journal of Adolescent Research, 11, 97-115.
Gottfredson, D.C., Karweit, N.L., & Gottfredson, G.D. (1989). Reducing Disorderly Behavior in
        Middle Schools. (Report No. 47). Baltimore, MD: John Hopkins University, Center of
        Research on Elementary and Middle Schools.
Greenberg, M. T., Weissberg, R. P., O’Brien, M. U., Zins, J. E., Fredericks, L., Resnik, H., &
        Elias, M. J. (2003). Enhancing school-based prevention and youth development through
        coordinated social, emotional, and academic learning. American Psychologist, 58, 466-
        474.
Greenwood, C. R., Delquadri, J., & Bulgren, J. (1993). Current challenges to behavioral
        technology in the reform of schooling: Large-scale, high-quality implementation and
        sustained use of effective educational practices. Education and Treatment of Children,
        16(4), 401-404.
Gresham, F. M., Van, M. B., & Cook, C. R. (2006). Social skills training for teaching replacement
        behaviors: Remediating acquisition deficits in at-risk students. Behavioral Disorders, 31,
        363-377.
Gresham, F. M., Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2001). Social competence of students with high-
        incidence disabilities: Conceptual and methodological issues in interpreting outcomes of
        social skills training. Exceptional Children, 67, 311-344.
Guerra, N. G., & Williams, K. R. (1996). A program planning guide for youth violence prevention:
        A risk-focused approach. Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence. University of
        Colorado, Boulder.
Harvey, M. T., Lewis-Palmer, T., Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2003). Trans-situational
        interventions: Generalization of behavior support across school and home environments.
        Behavioral Disorders, 28,299-213.
Hawken, L. (2006). School psychologists as leaders in the implementation of a targeted
        intervention: The Behavior Education Program (BEP). School Psychology Quarterly, 21,
        91-111.
Hawken, L. S. & Johnston, S. (in press). Preventing severe problem behavior in young children:
        The Behavior Education Program. Journal of Early and Intensive Behavior Intervention.
Hawken, L. & Horner, R. (2003). Evaluation of a targeted group intervention within a school-wide
        system of behavior support, Journal of Behavioral Education, 12, 225-240.
Hawken, L. S. & MacLeod, K. S., & O’Neill, R. (2007). Effects of function of problem behavior on
        the responsiveness to the Behavior Education Program. Manuscript submitted for
        publication.
Hawken, L. S., MacLeod, K. S., & Rawlings, L. (2007). Effects of the Behavior Education Program
        on office discipline referrals of elementary school students. Journal of Positive Behavior
        Interventions, 9, 94-101.
Heck, A. Collins, J., Peterson, L. (2001). Decreasing children’s risk taking on the playground.
        Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 34, 349-352.
Hirsch, E. J., Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Schnacker, L. (2004). Using school bus discipline
        referral data in decision making: Two case studies. Preventing School Failure, 48(4), 4-9.
Hoagwood, K. E., Olin, S. S., Kerker, B. D., Kratochwill, T. R., Crowe, M., & Saka, N. (2007).
        Empirically based school interventions targeted at academic and mental health
        functioning. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 15, 66-92.
Holburn, S., & Vietze, P. M. (2002) (Eds.). Person-centered planning: Research, practice, &
        future directions. Paul H. Brookes: Baltimore, MD.
Horner, R. H. (1994). Functional assessment: Contributions and future directions. Journal of
        Applied Behavior Analysis, 27, 401-404.
Horner, R. H., Carr, E. G., Halle, J., McGee, G., Odom, S., & Wolery, M. (2005). The use of
        single-subject research to identify evidence-based practice in special education.
        Exceptional Children, 71,165-180.
Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., Todd, A. W., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (2005). School-wide positive behavior
        support. In L. Bambara & L. Kern (Eds.), Individualized supports for students with
Data Dec 97


          problem behaviors: Designing positive behavior support plans (pp. 359-390). New York:
          Guilford Press.
Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2000). School-wide behavior support: An emerging initiative (special
          issue). Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 2, 231-233.
Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2001). “Data” need not be a four-letter word: Using data to improve
          schoolwide discipline. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 20-22.
Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Horner, H. F. (2000). A school-wide approach to student discipline.
          The School Administrator, 57(2), 20-24.
Horner, R., Sugai, G., Smolkowski, K., Eber, L., Nakasato, J., Todd, A., & Esperanza, J., (in
          press). A randomized, wait-list controlled effectiveness trial assessing school-wide
          positive behavior support in elementary schools. Journal of Positive Behavior
          Interventions.
Horner, R. H., Sugai, G. Todd, A. W., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (1999-2000). Elements of behavior
          support plans: A technical brief. Exceptionality, 8, 205-216.
Horner, R. H., Todd, A. W., Lewis-Palmer, T., Irvin, L. K., Sugai, G., & Boland, J. B. (2004). The
          school-Wide Evaluation Tool (SET): A research instrument for assessing school-wide
          positive behavior support, Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 3-12.
Hyman, I., Flanagan, D., & Smith, K. (1982). Discipline in the schools. In C. R. Reynolds & T. B.
          Gutkin (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology. (pp. 454-480). New York: Wiley.
Ingram, K., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Sugai, G. (2005). Function-based intervention planning:
          Comparing the effectiveness of FBA indicated and contra-indicated intervention plans.
          Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 7, 224-236.
Irvin, L. K., Horner, R. H., Ingram, K., Todd, A. W., Sugai, G., Sampson, N. K., & Boland, J. B.
          (2006). Using office discipline referral data for decision making about student behavior in
          elementary and middle schools: An empirical evaluation of validity. Journal of Positive
          Behavior Interventions, 8, 10-23.
Irvin, L.K., Tobin, T.J., Sprague, J.R., Sugai, G., & Vincent, C.G. (2004). Validity of office
          discipline referral measures as indices of school-wide behavioral status and effects of
          school-wide behavioral interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 131-
          147.
Irwin D., & Algozzine, R., (2005) North Carolina positive behavior supports evaluation report.
          Unpublished evaluation report.
Johnson, J. G., Cohen, P., Smailes, E. M., Kasen, S., & Brook. J. S. (2002). Television viewing
          and aggressive behavior during adolescence and adulthood. Science, 295, 2468-2471.
Jones, C., Caravaca, L., Cizek, S., Horner, R. H., & Vincent, C. G. (2006). Culturally responsive
          schoolwide positive behavior support: A case study in one school with a high proportion
          of Native American Students. Multiple Voices, 9(1),108-119.
Jones, V. F. & Jones, L. S. (2001). Comprehensive classroom management: Creating
                                                             th
          communities of support and solving problems (6 ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Kame’enui, E. J. (2007). A new paradigm: Responsiveness to intervention. Teaching Exceptional
          Children, 39(5), 6-7.
Kameenui, E. J., & Carnine, D. W. (2002). Effective teaching strategies that accommodate
                               nd
          diverse learners (2 ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill.
Kamps, D., Kravits, T., Stolze, J., & Swaggart, B. (1990). Prevention strategies for at-risk
          students and students with EBD in urban elementary schools. Journal of Emotional and
          Behavioral Disorders, 7, 178-188.
Kauffman, A., Todd, A., Meyer, G., & Horner, R., (in press). The effects of a targeted intervention
          to reduce problem behavior: Elementary School Implementation of Check-in/ Check-out.
          Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions.
Kauffman, J. (2005). Characteristics of emotional and behavior disorders of children and youth
          (8th ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill.
Kazdin, A. E. (1982). Applying behavioral principles in the schools. In C. R. Reynolds & T. B.
          Gutkin (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology (pp. 501-529). New York: Wiley.
Kellam, S. G., Ling. X., Merisca, R., Brown, C. H., & Ialong, N. (1998). The effect of the level of
          aggression in the first grade classroom on the course and malleability of aggressive
          behavior into middle school. Development and Psychopathology, 10, 165-185.
Data Dec 98


Kern, L., Gallagher, P., Starosta, K., Hickman, W., & George, M. (2006). Longitudinal outcomes
         of functional behavioral assessment-based interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 8, 67-78.
Kerr, M. M., & Nelson, C. M. (1998). Strategies for managing problem behaviors in the classroom
         (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill.
Kincaid, D. (1996). Person-centered planning. In L. Koegel, R. Koegel, & G. Dunlap (Eds.),
         Positive behavioral support: Including people with difficult behavior in the community (pp.
         439-465). Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes.
Kincaid, D., Childs, K., Blasé, K. A., & Wallace, F. (2007). Identifying barriers and facilitators in
         implementing schoolwide positive behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavioral
         Interventions, 9, 174-184.
Kincaid, D., & Fox, L. (2002). Person-centered planning and positive behavior support. In S.
         Holburn & P. M. Vietze (Eds.), Person-centered planning: Research, practice, & future
         directions (pp. 29-50). Paul H. Brookes: Baltimore, MD.
Knitzer, J. (1993). Children’s mental health policy: Challenging the future. Journal of Emotional
         and Behavioral Disorders, 1(1), 8-16.
Knitzer, J., Steinberg, Z., & Fleisch, B. (1990). At the schoolhouse door: An examination of
         programs and policies for children with behavioral and emotional problems. New York:
         Bank Street College of Education.
Knoff, H. M. (1985). Best practices in dealing with discipline referrals. In A. Thomas & J. Grimes
         (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology (pp. 251-262). Washington, DC: National
         Association of School Psychologists.
Koegel, L., K., Koegel, R. L., & Dunlap, G. (Eds.) (1996). Positive behavioral support: Including
         people with difficult behavior in the community. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes.
Kutash, K., & Duchnowski, A. J. (1997). Create comprehensive and collaborative systems.
         Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 5, 66-75.
Kutash, K., Duchnowski, A. J., & Lynn, N. (2006). School-based mental health: An empirical
         guide for decision-makers. Tampa, FL: University of South Florida. The Louis de la Parte
         Florida mental Health Institute. Department of Child and Family Studies. Research and
         Training Center for Mental Health.
Lane, K. L., Wehby, J., Menzies, H. M., Doukas, G. L., Munton, S. M., & Gregg, R. M. (2003).
         Social skills instruction for students at risk for antisocial behavior: The effects of small-
         group instruction. Behavioral Disorders, 28, 229-248.
Lassen, S., Steele, M., & Sailor, W. (2006). The relationship of school-wide positive behavior
         support to academic achievement in an urban middle school. Psychology in Schools
         43(6), 701-712.
Latham, G. I. (1997). Behind the schoolhouse door: Eight skills every teacher should have. Utah
         State University.
Latham, G. (1992). Interacting with at-risk children: The positive position. Principal, 72(1), 26-30.
Latham, G.I. (1988). The birth and death cycles of educational innovations. Principal, 68(1), 41-
         44.
Lee, Y., Sugai, G., & Horner, R. (1999). Effect of component skill instruction on math performance
         and on-task, problem, and off-task behavior of students with emotional and behavioral
         disorders. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 1, 195-204.
Lehr, C. A., Hansen, A., Sinclair, M. F., & Christenson, S. L. (2003). Moving beyond dropout
         towards school completion: An integrative review of data-based interventions. School
         Psychology Review, 32(3), 342-364.
Lehr, C. A., Sinclair, M. F., & Christenson, S. L. (2004). Addressing student engagement and
         truancy prevention during the elementary years: A replication study of the Check &
         Connect model. Journal of Education for Students Placed At Risk, 9(3), 279-301.
Lewis, T. J. (2001). Building infrastructure to enhance schoolwide systems of positive behavioral
         support: Essential features of technical assistance. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 10-12.
Lewis, T. J., & Daniels, C. (2000). Rethinking school discipline through effective behavioral
         support. Reaching Today’s Youth, 5, 43-47.
Data Dec 99


Lewis, T. J. Garrison-Harrell, L. (1999). Effective behavior support: Designing setting specific
          interventions. Effective School Practices, 17, 38-46.
Lewis, T. J., & Sugai, G. (1996). Functional assessment of problem behavior: A pilot investigation
          of the comparative and interactive effects of teacher and peer social attention on students
          in general education settings. School Psychology Quarterly, 11, 1-19
Lewis, T. J., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1998). Reducing problem behavior through a school-wide
          system of effective behavioral support: Investigation of a school-wide social skills training
          program and contextual interventions. School Psychology Review, 27, 446-459.
Lewis, T. J., & Newcomer, L. L. (2002). Examining the efficacy of school-based consultation:
          Recommendations for improving outcomes. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 165-
          181.
Lewis, T. J., & Newcomer, L., Kelk, M., & Powers, L. (2000). Preventing and addressing
          aggressive and violent behavior through individual systems of positive behavioral
          support. Reaching Today’s Youth, 5, 37-41.
Lewis, T. J., & Sugai, G. (1999). Effective behavior support: A systems approach to proactive
          school-wide management. Focus on Exceptional Children, 31(6), 1-24.
Lewis, T. J., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1998). Reducing problem behavior through a school-wide
          system of effective behavioral support: Investigation of a school-wide social skills training
          program and contextual interventions. School Psychology Review, 27, 446-459.
Lewis-Palmer, T., & Barrett, S. (2007). Establishing and sustaining statewide positive behavior
          support implementation: A description of Maryland’s Model. Journal of Evidence-based
          Practices for Schools, 8(1), 45-62.
Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Larson, S. (1999). Using data to guide decisions about program
          implementation and effectiveness. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 47-53.
Lipsey, M. W. (1991). The effect of treatment on juvenile delinquents: Results from meta-analysis.
          In F. Losel, D. Bender, & T. Bliesener (Eds), Psychology and law. New York: Walter de
          Gruyter.
Lipsey, M. W. (1992). Juvenile delinquency treatment: A meta-analytic inquiry into the variability
          of effects. In T. D. Cook, H. Cooper, D. S. Cordray, H. Hartman, L. V. Hedges, R. V.
          Light, T. A. Louis, & F. Mostellar (Eds), Meta-analysis for explanation. Beverly Hills, CA:
          Sage.
Lipsey, M. W., & Wilson, D. B. (1993). The efficacy of psychological, educational, and behavioral
          treatment: Confirmation from meta-analysis. American Psychologist, 48, 1181-1209.
Lohrmann-O’Rourke, S., Knoster, T., Sabatine, K., Smith, D., Horvath, G., & Llewellyn, G.,
          (2000). School-wide Application of PBS in the Bangor Area School District. Journal of
          Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4). 238-240.
Lucyshyn, J., Albin, R., Horner, R.H., Mann, J. C., Mann, J. A. & Wadsworth, G. (2007). Family
          implementation of positive behavior support with a child with autism: A longitudinal, single
          case experimental and descriptive replication and extension. Journal of Positive Behavior
          Interventions 9(3), 131-150.
Luiselli, J. K., Putnam, R. F., & Handler, M. W. (2001). Improving discipline practices in public
          schools: Description of a whole-school and district-wide model of behavior analysis
          consultation. The Behavior Analyst Today, 2(1), 18-26.
Luiselli, J. K, Putnam, R. F, Handler, M. W, & Feinberg, A. B. (2005). Whole-school positive
          behaviour support: Effects on student discipline problems and academic performance.
          Educational Psychology 25(2-3), 183-198.
Luiselli, J.K., Putnam, R.F., & Sunderland, M. (2002). Longitudinal evaluation of behavior support
          intervention in a public middle school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 182-
          188.
Lyst, A. M., Gabriel, S., O’Shaughnessy, T. E., Meyers, J., & Meyers, B. (2005).Social validity:
          Perceptions of Check and Connect with early literacy support. Journal of School
          Psychology, 43(3), 197-218.
March, R. E., & Horner, R.H. (2002). Feasibility and contributions of functional behavioral
          assessment in schools. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 10, 158-170.
Data Dec 100


Marr, M. B., Audette, B., White, R., Ellis, E., & Algozzine, B. (2002). School-wide discipline and
         classroom ecology. Special Services in the Schools, 18, 55-73.
Martella, R. C., Nelson, J. R., & Marchand-Martella, N. E. (2003). Managing disruptive behaviors
         in the schools: A schoolwide, classroom, and individualized social learning approach.
         Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Mayer, R. G. (2002). Behavioral strategies to reduce school violence. Child and Family Behavior
         Therapy, 24, 83-100.
Mayer, R. G. (1998). Constructive discipline for school personnel. Education and Treatment of
         Children, 22, 36-54.
Mayer, G. (1995). Preventing antisocial behavior in the schools. Journal of Applied Behavior
         Analysis, 28, 467-478.
Mayer, G. R., & Butterworth, T. (1979). A preventive approach to school violence and vandalism:
         An experimental study. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 57, 436-441.
Mayer, G. R., Butterworth, T., Komoto, T., & Benoit, R. (1983). The influence of the school
         principal on the consultant’s effectiveness. Elementary School Guidance and Counseling,
         17, 274-279.
Mayer, G. R., Butterworth, T., Nafpaktitis, M., & Suzer-Azaroff, B. (1983). Preventing school
         vandalism and improving discipline: A three year study. Journal of Applied Behavior
         Analysis, 16, 355-369.
Mayer, G. R., & Sulzer-Azaroff, B. (1990). Interventions for vandalism. In G. Stoner, M.K. Shinn,
         & H.M. Walker (Eds.), Interventions for achievement and behavior problems. National
         Association of School Psychologists Monograph. Washington, D.C.
McCord, J. (Ed.) (1995). Coercion and punishment in long-term perspective. New York:
         Cambridge University Press.
McCurdy, B. L., Kunsch, C., & Reibstein, S. (2007). Secondary prevention in the urban school:
         Implementing the Behavior Education Program. Preventing School Failure, 12-19.
McCurdy, B. L., Mannella, M. C., & Eldridge, N. (2003). Positive behavior support in urban
         schools: Can we prevent the escalation of antisocial behavior. Journal of Positive
         Behavioral Interventions, 5, 158-170.
McEvoy, A., & Welker, R. (2000). Antisocial behavior, academic failure, and school climate: A
         critical review. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 8(3), 130-141.
McIntosh, K., Borgmeier, C., Anderson, C. M., Horner, R. H., Rodriguez, B. J., & Tobin, T. J.
         (2008). Technical adequacy of the functional assessment checklist: Teachers and staff
         (FACTS) FBA interview measure. Journal of Behavior Intervention, 10, 33-45.
McIntosh, K. Chard, D., Boland, J., & Horner, R. (2006). A demonstration of combined efforts in
         school-wide academic and behavioral systems and incidence of reading and behavior
         challenges in early elementary grades. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. 8(3).
         146-154.
McIntosh, K., Flannery, K. B., Sugai, G., Braun, D., & Cochrane, K. L. (2008). Relationships
         between academics and problem behavior in the transition from middle school to high
         school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 243-255.
McIntosh, K., Horner, R.H., Chard, D., Boland, J., & Good, R. (in press). The use of reading and
         behavior screening measures to predict non-response to school-wide positive behavior
         support: A longitudinal analysis. School Psychology Review.
Metzler, C. W., Biglan, A., Rusby, J. C., & Sprague, J. R. (2001). Evaluation of a comprehensive
         behavior management program to improve school-wide positive behavior support.
         Education and Treatment of Children, 24, 448-479.
Miller, M., Fenty, N., & Scott, T. M. (in press). An examination of the effects of social skills
         instruction in the context of small group reading. Preventing School Failure.
Moore, D., W., Anderson, A., & Kumar, K. (2005). Instructional adaptation in the management of
         escape-maintained behavior in a classroom. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions,
         7, 216-223.
Moote, G., Smyth, N. J., & Wodarski, J. S. (1999).Social skills training with youth in school
         settings: A Review. Research on Social Work Practice, 9, 427-465.
Moran, D. J. & Malott, R. W. (2004) (Eds.). Evidence-based educational methods. San Diego,
         CA: Elsevier Academic Press.
Data Dec 101


Morgan, D. P., & Jenson, W. R. (1988). Teaching behaviorally disordered students: Preferred
         practices. Columbus, OH: Merrill.
Morrison, G. M., Furlong, M. J., & Morrison, R. L. (1997). The safe school: Moving beyond crime
         prevention to school empowerment. In A. Goldstein & J. Cooley (Eds.), The handbook of
         violence prevention. New York: Guilford.
Morse, A. B., Anderson, A. R., Christenson, S. L., & Lehr, C. A. (2004). Promoting school
         completion. Principal Leadership, 4(6), 9-13.
Muscott, H. S., Mann, E., Benjamin, T. B., Gately, S., Bell, K. E., & Muscott, A. J. (2004). Positive
         behavioral interventions and supports in New Hampshire: Preliminary results of a
         statewide system for implementing schoolwide discipline practices. Education and
         Treatment of Children, 27, 453-475.
Muscott, H. S., Mann, E. & LeBrun, M. R. (2008). Positive behavioral Interventions and supports
         in New Hampshire, Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10(3), 190-205.
Nakasato, J. (2000). Data-based decision making in Hawaii’s behavior support effort. Journal of
         Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 247-251.
Nelson, J. R. (1996). Designing schools to meet the needs of students who exhibit disruptive
         behavior. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4, 147-161.
Nelson, J. R., Colvin, G., & Smith, D. J. (1996). The effects of setting clear standards on students’
         social behavior in common areas of the school. The Journal of At-Risk Issues,
         Summer/Fall, 10-17.
Nelson, J. R., Johnson, A., & Marchand-Martella, N. (1996). Effects of direct instruction,
         cooperative learning, and independent learning practices on the classroom behavior of
         students with behavioral disorders: A comparative analysis. Journal of Emotional and
         Behavioral Disorders, 4, 53-62.
Nelson, J. R., Martella, R., & Galand, B. (1998). The effects of teaching school expectations and
         establishing a consistent consequence on formal office disciplinary actions. Journal of
         Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 6, 153-161.
Nersesian, M., Todd, A., Lehmann, J., & Watson, J., (2000). School-wide behavior support
         through district-level system change. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4).
         244-246.
Newcomer, L. L. & Lewis, T. J. (2004). Functional behavioral assessment: An investigation of
         assessment reliability and effectiveness of function-Based interventions. Journal of
         Emotional and Behavioral Disorders 12(3), 168-181.
Odom, S. L., Brantlinger, E., Gersten, R., Horner, R. H., Thompson, B., & Harris, K. R. (2005).
         Research in special education: Scientific methods and evidence-based practices.
         Exceptional Children, 71, 137-148.
O’Neill, R. E., Horner, R. H., Albin, R. W., Storey, K., & Sprague, J. R. (1997). Functional analysis
                                                                 nd
         of problem behavior: A practical assessment guide (2 ed.). Pacific Grove, CA:
         Brookes/Cole.
Paine, S. C., Radicchi, J., Rosellini, L. C., Deutchman, L., & Darch, C. B. (1983). Structuring your
         classroom for academic success. Champaign, IL: Research Press.
Patterson, G. R., Reid, J. B., & Dishion, T. J. (1992). Antisocial boys. Eugene, OR: Castalia
         Press.
Peters, M. T., & Heron, T. E. (1993). When the best is not good enough: An examination of best
         practice. Journal of Special Education, 26, 371-385.
Powers, L. J. (2003). Examining the effects of targeted group social skills intervention in schools
         with and without school-wide systems of positive behavior support. Unpublished doctoral
         dissertation. Columbia, MO: University of Missouri.
Preciado, J., Horner, R.H., & Baker, S. (2009). Using a function-based approach to decrease
         problem behavior and increase academic engagement for Latino English Language
         Learners. Journal of Special Education, 42, 227-240.
Pruitt, R., Kelsh, B., & Sugai, G. M. (1989). Pro-tickets: A positive school-wide behavior
         management program. In 1989 Oregon Conference Monograph. Eugene, OR:
         University of Oregon.
Data Dec 102


Putnam, R. F., Handler, M. W., Ramirez-Platt, C. M., & Luiselli, J. K. (2003). Improving student
         bus-riding behavior through a whole-school intervention. Journal of Applied Behavior
         Analysis, 36, 583-589.
Putnam, R.F., Luiselli, J.K., Handler, M.W., & Jefferson, G.L. (in press). Evaluating student
         discipline practices in a public school through behavioral assessment of office referrals.
         Behavior Modification.
Putnam, R. F., Luiselli, J. K., & Jefferson, G. L. (2002). Expanding technical assistance
         consultation to public schools: District-wide evaluation of instructional and behavior
         support practices for students with developmental disabilities. Child and Family Behavior
         Therapy, 24,113-128.
Putnam, R.F., Luiselli, J.K., Sennett, K., & Malonson, J. (2002). Cost-efficacy analysis of out-of-
         district special education placements: An evaluative measure of behavior support
         intervention in public schools. Journal of Special Education Leadership, 15, 17-24.
Putnam, R. F., Luiselli, J. K. & Sunderland, M. (2002). Longitudinal evaluation of behavior support
         intervention in a public middle school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 182-
         188.
Raffaele Mendez, L. M., Knoff, H. M., & Ferron, J. M. (2002). School demographic variables and
         out-of-school suspension rates: A quantitative and qualitative analysis of a large,
         ethnically diverse school district. Psychology in the Schools, 39, 259-277.
Reschly, A., & Christenson, S. L. (2006). School completion. In G. G. Bear & K. M. Minke (Eds.),
         Children’s needs III: Development, prevention, and intervention (pp. 103-112).
         Bethesda, MD: National Association of School Psychologists.
Reiss, S. (2005), Extrinsic and intrinsic motivation at 30: Unresolved scientific issues. Behavior
         Analysis, 28,1-14.
Rutherford, R. B., Jr., Quinn, M. M., & Mathur, S. R. (2004) (Eds.). Handbook of research in
         emotional and behavioral disorders. New York: Guildford Press.
Rutter, M., & Maughan, B. (2002). School effectiveness findings 1979-2002. Journal of School
         Psychology, 40, 451-475.
Ryan, J. B., Sanders, S., Katsiyannis, A., & Yell, M. L. (2007). Using timeout effectively in the
         classroom. Teaching Exceptional Children, 4(4), 60-67.
Sadler, C., (2000). Effective Behavior support implementation at the district level: Tigard-Tualatin
         School District. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4), 241-243.
Sadler, C., & Sugai, G. (2009). Effective behavior and instructional support: A district model for
         early identification and prevention of reading and behavior problems. Journal of Positive
         Behavior Interventions, 11, 35-46.
Safran, S. P. (2006). Using the effective behavior supports survey to guide development of
         schoolwide positive behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8, 3-9.
Safran, S. P. & Oswald, K. (2003). Positive behavior supports: Can schools reshape disciplinary
         practices? Exceptional Children, 69, 361-373.
Sailor, W. (1996). New structures and systems change for comprehensive positive behavioral
         support. In L., Koegel, R. Koegel, & G. Dunlap (Eds.), Positive behavioral support:
         Including people with difficult behavior in the community (pp. 163-206). Baltimore: Paul H.
         Brookes.
Schneider, T., Walker, H., & Sprague, J. (2000). Safe school design: A handbook for educational
         leaders. ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Management. University Oregon, Eugene.
Scott, T. M., & Barrett, S. B. (2004). Using staff and student time engaged in disciplinary
         procedures to evaluate the impact of school-wide PBS. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 6, 21-28.
Scott, T. M., & Caron, D. (2006). Functional behavior assessment at the school-wide level:
         Determining predictability and function of typical problem behaviors. Preventing School
         Failure50(1), 13-20.
Scott, T. M., & Eber, L. (2003). Functional assessment and wraparound as systemic school
         processes: Primary, secondary, and tertiary systems examples. Journal of Positive
         Behavior Interventions, 5, 131-143.
Data Dec 103


Scott, T. M., & Hunter, J. (2001). Initiative schoolwide support systems: An administrator’s guide
         to the process. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 13-15.
Scott, T. M., Liaupsin, C. J., Nelson, C. M., & Jolivette, K. (2003). Ensuring student success
         through team-based functional behavioral assessment. Teaching Exceptional Children,
         35(5), 16-21.
Scott, T. M., Liaupsin, C., & Nelson, C. M., & McIntyre, J. (2005). Team-based functional rehavior
         assessment as a proactive public school process: A descriptive analysis of current
         barriers. Journal of Behavioral Education 14(1), 57-71.
Scott, T. M., McIntyre, J., Liaupsin, C., Nelson, C. M., Conroy, M., & Payne, L. (2005). An
         examination of the relation between functional behavior assessment and selected
         intervention strategies with school-based teams. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 7(4), 205-215.
Scott, T. M., & Nelson, C. M. (1999). Using functional behavioral assessment to develop effective
         intervention plans: Practical classroom applications. Journal of Positive Behavior
         Interventions, 1, 242-251.
Simeonsson, R.J. (1994). Risk, resilience, and prevention: Promoting the well-being of all
         children. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes Publishing Co.
Simonsen, B., Fairbanks, S., Briesch, A., Myers, D., & Sugai, G. (2008). Evidence-based
         practices in classroom management: Considerations for research to practice. Education
         and Treatment of Children, 31, 351-380.
Sinclair, M. F., Christenson, S. L., Evelo, D. L., & Hurley, C. M. (1998). Dropout prevention for
         youth with disabilities: Efficacy of a sustained school engagement procedure.
         Exceptional Children, 65(1), 7-21.
Sinclair, M., Hurley, C., Christenson, S., Thurlow, M., & Evelo, D. (2002). Connections that keep
         kids coming to school. In R. Algozzine & P. Kay (Eds.), Preventing problem behaviors:
         A handbook of successful prevention strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.
Sinclair, M. F., Christenson, S. L., & Thurlow, M. L. (2005). Promoting school completion of urban
         secondary youth with emotional or behavioral disabilities. Exceptional Children, 71, 465-
         482.
Sinclair, M. F., Lam, S. F., Christenson, S. L. & Evelo, D. (1994). Parent-teacher action research
         in profile. Equity and Choice, 10(1), 21-35.
Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (1999). The dark side of zero tolerance: Can punishment lead to
         safe schools? Phi Delta Kappan, 80, 372-382.
Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (2000). School discipline at a crossroads: From zero tolerance to
         early response. Exceptional Children, 66, 335-347.
Skiba, R. J., Peterson, R. L., & Williams, T. (1997). Office referrals and suspensions: Disciplinary
         intervention in middle schools. Education and Treatment of Children, 20, 295-315.
Skiba, R., Rausch, M. K., & Ritter, S. (2004). Children left behind: Series summary and
         recommendations. Education Policy Briefs, 2(4), 1-4. (also see issues 1-3).
Sprague, J., & Biglan, A., et al (in progress). A randomized control trial of school-wide positive
         behavior support with middle schools.
Sprague, J., Nishioka, V., & Smith, S., (2007). Safe schools, positive behavior supports, and
         mental health supports: Lessons learned from three safe schools/healthy students
         communities. Journal of School Violence. 6(2) 93-115.
Sprague, J., Sugai, G., & Walker, H. (I1999). Antisocial behavior in schools. In S. Watson & F.
         Gresham (Eds.), Child behavior therapy: Ecological considerations in assessment,
         treatment, and evaluation. New York, NY: Plenum Press.
Sprague, J., Walker, H., Golly, A., White, K., Myers, D. R., & Shannon, T. (2001). Translating
         research into effective practice: The effects of a universal staff and student intervention
         on indicators of discipline and school safety. Education and Treatment of Children, 24,
         495-511.
Sprick, R., Booher, M., & Garrison, M. (2009). Behavioral response to intervention: Creating a
         continuum of problem-solving & support. Eugene, OR: Pacific Northwest Publishing.
Sprick, R., Sprick, M., & Garrison, M. (1992). Foundations: Developing positive school-wide
         discipline policies. Longmont, CO: Sopris West.
Data Dec 104


Stover, A. C., Dunlap, G., & Neff, B. (in press). The effects of a contingency contracting program
         on the nocturnal enuresis of three children. Research on Social Work Practice.
Stormont, M., Lewis, T. J., & Beckner, R. (2005). Positive behavior support systems: Applying key
         features in preschools settings. Teaching Exceptional Children, 37(2), 42-49.
Strain, P. S., & Joseph, G. E. (2004). A not so good job with “Good Job”: A response to Kohn
         2001. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 55-59.
Sugai, G. (1996). Providing effective behavior support to all students: Procedures and processes.
         SAIL, 11(1), 1-4.
Sugai, G. M. (1992). The design of instruction and the proactive management of social
         behaviors. Learning Disabilities Forum, 17(2), 20-23.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2005). Educational applications (Volume III). In M. Hersen.
         Encyclopedia of behavior modification and cognitive behavior therapy. Sage Publications:
         New York.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2002). The evolution of discipline practices: School-wide positive
         behavior supports. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 23-50.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2001). Features of effective behavior support at the district level.
         Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 16-19.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (1999). Discipline and behavioral support: Preferred processes and
         practices. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 10-22.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. (1994). Including students with severe behavior problems in general
         education settings: Assumptions, challenges, and solutions. In J. Marr, G. Sugai, & G.
         Tindal (Eds.). The Oregon conference monograph, 6, 102-20. Eugene, OR: University of
         Oregon.
Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (1999-2000). Including the functional behavioral assessment
         technology in schools (invited special issue). Exceptionality, 8, 145-148.
Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., Dunlap, G. Hieneman, M., Lewis, T. J., Nelson, C. M., Scott, T.,
         Liaupsin, C., Sailor, W., Turnbull, A. P., Turnbull, H. R., III, Wickham, D., Wilcox, B., &
         Ruef, M. (2000). Applying positive behavioral support and functional behavioral
         assessment in schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 131-143.
Sugai, G., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Hagan-Burke, S. (1999-2000). Overview of the functional
         behavioral assessment process. Exceptionality, 8, 149-160.
Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., & Gresham, F. (2002). Behaviorally effective school environments. In M.
         R. Shinn, G. Stoner, & H. M. Walker (Eds), Interventions for academic and behavior
         problems: Preventive and remedial approaches (pp. 315-350). National Association of
         School Psychologists. Silver Spring, MD.
Sugai, G., Horner, R., & Todd, A. (1996). Effective behavior support systems survey. Behavioral
         Research and Teaching, University of Oregon. Eugene, Oregon.
Sugai, G., & Lewis, T. (1996). Preferred and promising practices for social skills instruction.
         Focus on Exceptional Children, 29(4), 1-16.
Sugai, G., & Pruitt, R. (1993). Phases, steps, and guidelines for building school-wide behavior
         management programs: A practitioner's handbook. Behavior Disorders Handbook No. 1.
         Behavior Disorders Program. University of Oregon. Eugene.
Sugai, G., Simonsen, B., & Horner, R. H. (2008) (Eds.). Schoolwide positive behavior supports: A
         continuum of positive behavior supports for all students (invited special issue). Teaching
         Exceptional Children, 40(6). 5.
Sugai, G., & Tindal, G. (1993). Effective school consultation: An interactive approach. Pacific
         Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1994). Achieving educational excellence: Behavior analysis
         for achieving classroom and schoolwide behavior change. San Marcos, CA: Western
         Image.
Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1986). Achieving educational excellence: Using behavioral
         strategies. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1994). Achieving educational excellence: Behavior analysis
         for achieving classroom and schoolwide behavior change. San Marcos, CA: Western
         Image.
Data Dec 105


Taylor-Greene, S., Brown, D., Nelson, L., Longton, J., Gassman, Cohen, J., Swartz, J., Horner,
        R. H., Sugai, G., & Hall, S. (1997). School-wide behavioral support: Starting the year off
        right. Journal of Behavioral Education, 7, 99-112.
Taylor-Greene, S. J., & Kartub, D. T. (2000). Durable implementation of school-wide behavior
        support: The high five program. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 233-245.
Thurlow, M. L., Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., & Evelo, D. L. (1997). Wanting the unwanted:
        Keeping those "out of here" kids in school.Beyond Behavior, 8(3), 10-16.
Tobin, T., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1996). Patterns in middle school discipline records. Journal of
        Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4(2), 82-94.
Todd, A. W., Campbell, A. L., Meyer, G. W., & Horner, R. H. (2008). The effects of a targeted
        intervention to reduct problem behaviors: Elementary school implementation of check in-
        check out. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 46-55.
Todd, A., Horner, R., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1999). Individualizing school-wide discipline for
        students with chronic problem behaviors: A team approach. Effective School Practices,
        17(4), 72-82.
Todd, A. W., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Sprague, J. R. (1999). Effective behavior support:
        Strengthening school-wide systems through a team-based approach. Effective School
        Practices, 17(4), 23-27.
Todd, A., Horner, R., Vanater, S., & Schneider, C. (1995). Working together to make change: An
        example of positive behavior support for a student with traumatic brain injury. Education
        and Treatment of Children, 20, 23-33.
Todd, A. W., Kauffman, A., Meyer, G., & Horner, R.H. (in press). The effects of a targeted
        intervention to reduce problem behaviors: Elementary school implementation of check-in-
        check-out. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions.
Tolan, P., & Guerra, N. (1994). What works in reducing adolescent violence: An empirical review
        of the field. Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence. University of Colorado,
        Boulder.
Turnbull, A., Edmonson, H., Griggs, P., Wickham, D., Freeman, R., Guess, D., Lassen, S.,
        McCart, A., Park. J., Riffel, L., Turnbull, R. & Warren. J. (2002). A blueprint for
        schoolwide positive behavior support: Implementation of three components. Exceptional
        Children, 68, 377-402.
Turnbull, H.R., & Turnbull, A.P., (with Stowe, M., & Wilcox, B.L.) (2000). Free appropriate public
        education: The law and children with disabilities (6th ed.). Denver: Love Publishing Co.
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (2001). Youth violence: A report of the surgeon
        general. Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for
        Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Injury Prevention and Control;
        Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, Center for Mental Health
        Services; and National Institutes of Health, national Institute of Mental Health.
Utley, C. A., & Sailor, W. (2002). Positive behavior support and urban school improvement: A
        special section of the Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions. Journal of Positive
        Behavior Interventions, 4, 195.
VanDenBerg, J. E., & Grealish, E. M. (1996). Individualized services and supports through
        wraparound process: Philosophy and procedures. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 5,
        7-21.
Vaughn, B., White, R., Dunlap, G., & Strobeck, S. (in press). A case study of a classroom
        intervention for problem behaviors: Collateral effects and social validation. Journal of
        Positive Behavior Interventions.
Wagner, M., Sumi, C., et al., (under consideration). Effectiveness study of school-wide positive
        behavior support.
Walker, H. M. (1998). First Steps to prevent antisocial behavior. Teaching Exceptional Children,
        30(4), 16-19.
Walker, H. M., Block-Pedego, A., Todis, B., & Severson, H. (1991). School archival records
        search (SARS): User’s guide and technical manual. Longmont, CO: Sopris West.
Walker, H., Colvin, G., & Ramsey, E. (1995). Antisocial behavior in public school: Strategies and
        best practices. Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole.
Data Dec 106


Walker, H. M., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., Bullis, M., Sprague, J. R., Bricker, D., & Kaufman, M. J.
         (1996). Integrated approaches to preventing antisocial behavior patterns among school-
         age children and youth. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4, 194-209.
Walker, H. M., Kavanagh, K., Golly, A., Stiller, B., Severson, H. H., & Feil, E. G. (1996). First
         steps: An early intervention program for antisocial kindergartners. College of Education,
         University of Oregon. Eugene, Oregon.
Walker, H. M., Kavanagh, K., Stiller, B., Golly, A., Severson, H. H., & Feil, E. G. (1998). First Step
         to Success: An early intervention approach for preventing school antisocial behavior.
         Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 6(2), 66-80.
Walker, H. M., Ramsey, E., Gresham, R. M. (2005). Antisocial behavior in school: Evidence-
         based practices (2nd Ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth/Thomson Learning.
Walker, H. M., & Severson, H. H. (1990). Systematic screening for behavior disorders (SSBD):
         User’s guide and technical manual. Longmont, CO: Sopris West.
Walker, H., Stiller, B., & Golly, A. (1998). First Step to Success: A collaborative Home-School
         Intervention for Preventing Antisocial Behavior at the Point of School Entry. Young
         Exceptional Children, 1(2), 2-6.
Weiss, N. R., & Knoster, T. (2008). It may be nonaversive, but is it a positive approach? Relevant
         questions to ask through the process of behavioral assessment and intervention. Journal
         of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 72-78.
Wolery, M. R., Bailey, D. B., Jr., & Sugai, G. M. (1988). Effective teaching: Principles and
         procedures of applied behavior analysis with exceptional children. Boston, MA: Allyn &
         Bacon.
Wong, H. K., & Wong, R. T. (1991). The first days of school: How to be an effective teacher.
         Sunnyvale, CA: Harry K. Wong.
Wright, J. A., & Dusek, J. B. (1998). Research into practice: Compiling school base rates for
         disruptive behaviors from student disciplinary referral data. School Psychology Review,
         27, 138-147.
Yell, M. L., Meadows, N. B., Drasgow, E., Shriner, J. G. (2009). Evidence-based practices for
         educating students with emotional and behavioral disorders. Upper Saddle River, NJ:
         Pearson.
Yell, M. L., Shriner, J. G., & Katsiyannis, A. (2006). Individuals with disabilities education
         improvement act of 2004 and IDEA regulations of 2006: Implications for educators,
         administrators, and teacher trainers. Focus on Exceptional Children, 39(1), 1-24.
Zins, J. E., & Ponti, C. R. (1990). Best practices in school-based consultation. In A. Thomas and
         J. Grimes (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology - II (pp. 673-694). Washington, DC:
         National Association of School Psychologists.
Data Dec 107




        Appendix M

Data-based Decision Making &
  Office Discipline Referrals
Data Dec 108


                 Guidelines for Data-Based Decision Making
                   (Sugai, Todd, Lewis-Palmer, Hagan-Burke)


                     Data-based Action Planning Process


   1. Use team
   2. Identify the decisions needed
   3. Identify data sources
          a. Office discipline referrals
          b. Attendance, tardies
          c. Suspensions, detentions, expulsions
          d. Academic performance
          e. Staff perceptions
                  i. EBS survey
                 ii. SET data
                 iii. Team Implementation Checklist
                iv. Safe Schools Survey
   4. Summarize data
   5. Analyze data
   6. Build action plan based on data


Other Guidelines
1. Use impact of individual student behavioral incidents (repeat rule violations)
   on school-wide behavior incidents when deciding where to focus action
   planning (i.e., school-wide, nonclassroom, classroom, targeted group,
   targeted individual).
2. Consider location, type, time of day, etc. of behavior incidents to increase
   relevance, effectiveness, and efficiency of action planning process.
3. If adequate progress and/or goal achieved, consider modifications that would
   a. Improve effectiveness and efficiency
   b. Remove intervention elements that are ineffective and efficient
   c. Decrease amount of effort and/or resources
Data Dec 109


                              General Data Decision Rules9



                                 IF….,                                  FOCUS ON….

          >40% of students received 1+ ODR10
                                                                     School-wide System
          >2.5 ODR/student

          >60% of referrals come from classroom
                                                                      Classroom System
          >50% of ODR come from <10% of classrooms

          >35% of referrals come from non-classroom settings
                                                                    Non-Classroom Systems
          >15% of students referred from nonclassroom
          settings

                                                                       Targeted Group
          >10-15 students receive >5 ODR
                                                                        Interventions

          <10 students with >10 ODR

          <10 students continue rate of referrals after receiving
                                                                     Individualized Action
          targeted group support
                                                                        Team Systems
          Small # students destabilizing overall functioning of
          school




9
    Sprague, Sugai, Horner, & Walker (2000)
10
     ODR = Office Discipline Referral
Data Dec 110


          General Questions for Monthly/Annual Decisions
1. How are we doing to date? Look at….
      a. # referrals per day per month.
             i. What patterns are apparent across months?
      b. # referrals by student
             i. Are concerns individual or school-wide?
      c. # referrals by location.
             i. Where are referrals coming from?
      d. #/kinds of problem behaviors
             i. What problems are of most concern?
      e. # problem behaviors by time of day
             i. When are most problem behaviors occurring?
2. What should we do next?
      a. All’s well
             i. What can we eliminate?
             ii. How can we make current activities more efficient?
            iii. What needs to be addressed next?
      b. So-so
             i. What is and is not working?
             ii. What can we do to increase the efficiency, effectiveness, or
                 relevance of what we are doing?
      c. Not well
             i. What is and is not working?
             ii. What can we do to improve what we are currently doing?
            iii. Do we need to look at other information to understand what
                 to do next?
            iv. What other strategies do we need to look at?
Data Dec 111


                       Establishing an Evaluation Plan
                          (see Evaluation Worksheet)
1. Develop evaluation questions.
   a. What do you want to know?
2. Identify indicators for answering each question.
   a. What information can be collected?.
3. Develop methods and schedules for collecting and analyzing indicators.
   a. How and when should this information be gathered?
4. Make decisions from analysis of indicators.
   a. What is the answer for the question?


                         Basic Evaluation Questions
                                    Sugai 11-26-03




                           What does "it" look like now?




                       Are we satisfied with how "it" looks?




                        What would we like "it" to look like?




                  What would we need to do to make "it" look like
                                     that?




                   How would we know if we've been successful?




                       What can we do to keep "it" like that?
Page 112



                              Data-based Decision Making Worksheet


                                           When do they
                           Who needs the                     Data Indicators &     Data Collection
     Evaluation Question                     need the
                            information?                         Sources         Methods & Schedule
                                           information?


1.



2.



3.



4.



5.



6.
Page 113



                         Practices Evaluation Decision Flowchart


      Start




Review questions
                         Does problem              Specify features of
& data on regular                            Yes
                            exist?                   need/problem
      basis




                    No

                                                    Identify practice
                                                     that addresses
                                                     need/problem?




                                                       Is practice             Is evidence of
                                                                                                     Consider another
                                                        research         No     effectiveness   No
                                                                                                         practice
                                                         based?                  available?



                                                          Yes            Yes




                                                      Can practice
                                                                                                No
                                                      be adapted?




                                                          Yes




                                        No           Implement &
                                                    monitor effects




                                                      Is adequate
                                                        progress
                                                       observed?



                                                          Yes


                                                   Improve efficiency
                                                   & sustainability of
                                                        practice
                                                    implementation
Page 114


                         Discipline Referral Data Self-Assessment
                             (Sugai, Simonsen, & Palmer, 1/5/99, DRAFT)


Name of School_______________________________                             Date_______________

To be completed by school leadership team. Rate the status of each feature of a
            discipline referral data management procedure. Develop an action plan for
            item(s) “not in place.”


         F = Fully in place                P = Partially in place            N = Not in place


Status                                                Feature
F P N    Clear distinctions between administrator versus staff managed rule-violations
F P N    Proactive comprehensive school-wide discipline system
F P N    Clear definitions for rule violations
F P N    Complete recording form (e.g., office discipline referral, behavioral incident)
F P N    Positively stated & defined student expectations
F P N    Written school-wide discipline policy
F P N    System for storing & maintaining data
F P N    Discipline leadership team
F P N    Team-based problem-solving format
F P N    Schedule for regular collection & summarization of data
F P N    Schedule for regular team meetings to review data
F P N    Person designated to manage & maintain data
F P N    Person designated to summarize & graph data on monthly basis
F P N    Standard set of evaluation questions to be considered
F P N    Criteria or decision rules for team to evaluate data
F P N    Opportunity for team to develop recommendations based on data
F P N    Opportunity for team to present, discuss, modify, & establish action plan with staff
F P N    Opportunity for staff to learn activities for implementation of action plan
F P N    Procedures for monitoring accuracy & consistency of implementation of action plan activities
F P N    Procedures for modifying action plan based on data
F P N
F P N
F P N
F P N
Page 115



                                                  References
Colvin, G., Kameenui, E. J., & Sugai, G. (1993). School-wide and classroom management:
        Reconceptualizing the integration and management of students with behavior problems in
        general education. Education and Treatment of Children, 16, 361-381.
Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Todd, A. W. (2001). “Data” need not be a four-letter word: Using data to
        improve schoolwide discipline. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 20-26.
Horner, R.H., & Sugai, G., (2005). School-wide positive behavior support: An alternative approach to
        discipline in schools. In L. Bambara & L. Kern (Eds.) Individualized supports for students with
        problem behaviors: Designing positive behavior plans (pp. 359-390). New York: Guilford Press.
Irvin, L.K., Tobin, T.J., Sprague, J.R., Sugai, G., & Vincent, C.G. (2004). Validity of office discipline referral
          measures as indices of school-wide behavioral status and effects of school-wide behavioral
          interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 131-147.
Irvin, L. K., Horner, R. H., Ingram, K., Todd, A. W., Sugai, G., Sampson, N. K., & Boland, J. B. (2006). Using
          office discipline referral data for decision making about student behavior in elementary and
          middle schools: An empirical evaluation of validity. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions,
          8,10-23.
Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Larson, S. (1999). Using data to guide decisions about program
       implementation and effectiveness. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 47-53.
Spaulding, S. A., Horner, R. H., Irvin, L. K., May, S. L., Emeldi, M., Tobin, T. J., & Sugai, G. (In press).
        School-wide social-behavioral climate, student problem behavior, and related administrative
        decisions: Empirical patterns from 1,510 schools nationwide. Journal of Positive Behavioral
        Interventions.
Sprague, J. R., Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., & Walker, H. M. (1999). Using office discipline referral data to
       evaluate school-wide discipline and violence prevention interventions. Oregon School Studies
       Council Bulletin, 42(2), 1-17.
Sugai, G., Sprague, J. R., Horner, R. H., & Walker, H. M. (2000). Preventing school violence: The use of
        office discipline referrals to assess and monitor school-wide discipline interventions. Journalof
        Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 8, 94-101.
Taylor-Greene, S., Brown, D., Nelson, L., Longton, J., Gassman, Cohen, J., Swartz, J., Horner, R. H., Sugai,
        G., & Hall, S. (1997). School-wide behavioral support: Starting the year off right. Journal of
        Behavioral Education, 7, 99-112.
Tobin, T., & Sugai, G. (1999). Predicting violence at school, chronic discipline problems, and high school
        outcomes from sixth graders’ school records. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 7,
        40-53.
Tobin, T., & Sugai, G. (1999). Discipline problems, placements, and outcomes for students with serious
        emotional disturbance. Behavioral Disorders, 24, 109-121.
Tobin, T., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1996). Patterns in middle school discipline records. Journal of Emotional
        and Behavioral Disorders, 4(2), 82-94.
Wright, J. A., & Dusek, J. B. (1998). Research into practice: Compiling school base rates for disruptive
        behaviors from student disciplinary referral data. School Psychology Review, 27, 138-147.
Page 116




                              ™

                                             Documentation Project


                       Referral Form Examples
                                    Version 2.0
                                   June 16, 2003

                       Anne W. Todd & Rob H. Horner




Intended Audience
        Referral form examples are for School Administrators, school teams and SWIS
Facilitators to use as a guide for developing an office discipline referral form.

Description
       The three available referral form examples are each compatible with SWIS. Each
example is formatted differently, in size of paper, actual categories on the form, and the
order of the information to be recorded.

For more Information

      Go to www.swis.org
Page 117


        Example A

                                               TM
                                        SWIS        OFFICE DISCIPLINE REFERRAL FORM
Student(s) _________________ Referring Staff _____________ Grade Level ____ Date ______ Time ___

Location

 Classroom                                  Cafeteria                  Bus loading zone                           Other __________

 Playground                                 Bathroom/restroom          Parking lot

 Commons/common area                        Gym                        On bus

 Hallway/ breezeway                   Library                          Special event/assembly/ field trip
Problem Behaviors (check the most intrusive)

 MINOR                                               MAJOR                               Skip class/ truancy      Vandalism

 Inappropriate lang.                                 Abusive lang./ inapprop. lang       Forgery/ theft            Property damage

 Physical contact                                    Fighting/ physical aggression       Dress code               Bomb threat
                                                                                         violation
 Defiance/disrespect/ non-compliance                 Defiance/disrespect/insubordin                               Arson
                                                    ation/non-compliant                  Lying/cheating
 Disruption                                                                                                       Weapons
                                                     Harassment/ tease/ taunt            Tobacco
 Property misuse                                                                                                  Other __________
                                                     Disruption                          Alcohol/drugs
 Other _______________________
                                                     Tardy                               Combustibles
Possible Motivation
 Obtain peer attention            Avoid tasks/activities               Don’t know
 Obtain adult attention     Avoid peer(s)                     Other ________________
 Obtain items/ activities         Avoid adult(s)
Others Involved
 None             Peers        Staff         Teacher              Substitute         Unknown Other ___________________
Administrative Decision
 Time in office                        Detention                   Saturday School                          In-school suspension
 Loss of privilege                     Parent contact               Individualized instruction            Out-of-school suspension
 Conference with student               Other _______________

Comments:

Follow up comments:
Page 118
  Example B
                                      Office Referral Form
  Name: ____________________________                             Location
  Date: _____________      Time: ________                   Playground Library
  Teacher: __________________________                       Cafeteria    Bathroom
  Grade: K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8                                  Hallway      Arrival/Dismissal
  Referring Staff: _____________________                    Classroom Other ________


    Problem Behavior              Possible Motivation          Administrative Decision
Minor
   Inappropriate language         Obtain peer attention          Loss of privilege
   Physical contact               Obtain adult attention         Time in office
   Defiance                       Obtain items/activities        Conference with
   Disruption                     Avoid Peer(s)                  student
   Property misuse                Avoid Adult                    Parent Contact
   Other ______________           Avoid task or activity         Individualized
Major                             Don’t know                     instruction
   Abusive language               Other ______________           In-school suspension
   Fighting/ Physical                                            (____hours/ days)
   aggression                                                    Out of school
   Overt Defiance                                                suspension (_______
   Harassment/ tease/                                            days)
   taunt                                                         Other ______________
   Disruption
Other ______________

  Others involved in incident: None        Peers   Staff  Teacher   Substitute
                                  Unknown    Other
  If peers were involved, list them ___________________________________________
  Other comments: ______________________________________________________
  ______________________________________________________________________

          I need to talk to the students’ teacher       I need to talk to the administrator

  Parent Signature: __________________________ Date: __________________

  All minors are filed with classroom teacher. Three minors equal a major.

  All majors require administrator consequence parent contact and signature.
Page 119
   Example C

                            Office Discipline Referral Form

Name: _________________________ Grade: _____         Date: _____________
Referring Person: ______________________________     Time: ____________
Other Student(s) involved: ___________________________________________

Issue of Concern          Location                 Possible Motivation

Major Problem Behaviors
 abusive lang             playground              Attention from peer(s)
fighting/physical agg     cafeteria               Attention from adult(s)
 harassment               passing area            Avoid peer(s)
 overt defiance           bathroom                Avoid adult(s)
Minor Problem Behaviors  arrival/dismissal         Avoid work
 inappropriate. lang      classroom              O btain item(s)
 disruption         restricted area        Other _______________
 property misuse  special event            Don’t know
 non -compliance          common instructional area

What happened?___________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________

Consequences
 lose recess             lose other privilege ___________________________
 conference              in-school suspension
 parent contact          out of-school suspension
                               -
 follow up agreement


                            See Follow-Up Agreement Over
Page 120
                                  Follow up Agreement

Name: __________________________               Date: __________________

1.   What rule(s) did you break? (Circle)

      Be Safe             Be Respectful              Be Responsible

2.   What did you want?

       I wanted attention from others        I wanted to be in control of the situation
       I wanted to challenge adult(s)        I wanted to avoid doing my work
       I wanted to be sent home              I wanted revenge
       I wanted to cause problems because I feel miserable inside
       I wanted to cause others problems because they don’t like me
       I wanted _________________________________________

3.   Did you get what you wanted?  yes  no

4.   What will you do differently next time?

     I will be _____________________________ by _________________________

5.   Student signature: __________________________________________

6.   Adult signature(s): _____________________________________
Page 121


                                  ™

                                               Documentation Project


                           Readiness Checklist
                                    Version 1.2
                                   June 20, 2003

                        Anne W. Todd & Rob H. Horner




Intended Audience
     SWIS Facilitators use the Readiness Checklist to prepare schools for SWIS
compatibility prior to the licensing process


Description

     The Readiness Checklist is a list of ten requirements for obtaining a SWIS License
Agreement.

For more Information

      Go to www.swis.org
Page 122
                                                                   SWIS™ Readiness Checklist

SWIS™ Facilitator_________________________________                    School___________________________________   Year______________


                          Requirement                                      Tasks to Complete           Who will       By When      Date of
                                                                                                       Complete                  Completion

1. School-wide discipline is one of the top three goals for the
school.

2. Administrative support for the implementation and use of
SWIS™ is available.

3. A behavior support team exists, and they review referral
data at least once a month.

4. The school uses an office discipline referral form that is
compatible with SWIS™ referral entry.

5. The school has a coherent office discipline referral
procedure that includes (a) definitions for behaviors resulting
in office-managed vs. staff-managed referrals and (b) a
predictable system for managing disruptive behavior.

6. Data entry time is allocated and scheduled to ensure that
office referral data will be current to within a week at all times.

7. Three People within the school are identified to receive
one, 2-hour training on the use of SWIS™.

8. The school has computer access to Internet, and one of
two web browsers. (Netscape 6, Internet Explorer 5)

9. The school agrees to on-going training for the team
receiving SWIS™ data on uses of SWIS™ information for
discipline decision-making.

10. The school district agrees to provide a facilitator who will
work with school personnel on data collection and decision-
making procedures.
Page 123




                         ™

                                       Documentation Project


                    Compatibility Checklist
                                Version 2.0
                            September 12, 2002

                                Anne W. Todd




Intended Audience
        The Compatibility Checklist is used primarily by SWIS Facilitators to
support school teams as they design a system for documenting and monitoring
office discipline referrals that is SWIS-compatible. School teams can also use the
checklist as they prepare a coherent system for dealing with problem behavior in
their school and for the use of SWIS>

Description
      The Compatibility Checklist is an available tool for ensuring that all
necessary categories are being documented on a referral form.

For more Information

       Go to www.swis.org
Page 124


              Procedure for Documenting Office Discipline Referrals
                        SWIS II™ Compatibility Checklist

School __________________________________                          Date _______________


                                                                           Date        Date
                       Compatibility Question

1. Does a clear distinction exist between problem behaviors that are
staff management versus office managed exist and is it available for      Yes   No   Yes   No
staff reference?

2. Does a form exist that is SWIS compatible for SWIS data entry
                                                                          Yes   No   Yes   No
including the following categories?

                                  a. Student name?                        Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  b. Date?                                Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  c. Time of incident?                    Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  d. Student’s teacher (optional)?        Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  e. Student’s grade level?               Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  f. Referring staff member?              Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  g. Location of incident?                Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  h. Problem behavior?                    Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  i. Possible motivation?                 Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  j. Others involved?                     Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  k. Administrative decision?             Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  l. Other comments?                      Yes   No   Yes   No

                                  m. No more than 3 extra info.           Yes   No   Yes   No

3. Does set of definitions exist that clearly defines all categories on
                                                                          Yes   No   Yes   No
the office discipline referral form?

4. Does office discipline referral procedure and form exist that meet
                                                                          Yes   No   Yes   No
SWIS criteria?

Next review date: _______________

                Redesign your form until answers to all questions are “Yes.”
Page 125




      Appendix N

 Restraint and Seclusion
Considerations and SWPBS
Page 126



                                                    Considerations for Seclusion and
                                                   Restraint Use in School-wide Positive
                                                           Behavior Supports11

                               Robert Horner and George Sugai
Co-directors OSEP Technical Assistance Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and
                                      Support
                                        April 29, 2009
                                           Concern
Seclusion and restraint (S/R) refer to safety procedures in which a student is isolated from
others (seclusion) or physically held (restraint) as a response by trained staff to serious
problem behavior that places the student or others at risk of injury or harm. A review of
the history of S/R indicates that these procedures are prone to misapplication and abuse
placing students at equal or more risk than their problem behavior. Concerns include the
following:
     1. S/R are inappropriately selected and implemented as “treatment” or “behavioral
        intervention,” rather than as a safety procedure.
     2.    S/R are inappropriately used for behaviors that do not place the student or others
          at risk of harm or injury (e.g., noncompliance, threats, disruption).
     3. Students, peers, and/or staff may be physically hurt or injured during attempts to
        conduct S/R.
     4. Risk of injury and harm is increased because S/R are implemented by staff who
        are not adequatelyand expertly trained.
     5. Use of S/R may inadvertently result in reinforcement or strengthening of the
        problem behavior.
     6. S/R are implemented independent of comprehensive and function-based
        behavioral intervention plans.
                                     Toward Effective Policy
     1. The majority of problem behaviors that are used to justify S/R could be prevented
        with early identification and intensive early intervention. The need for S/R
        procedures is in part a result of insufficient investment in prevention efforts.
     2. S/R can be included as a safety response, but should not be included in a behavior
        support plan without a formal functional behavioral assessment (a process used to
        identify why the problem behavior continues to occur).

11
 The development of this paper was supported in part by a grant from the Office of Special
Education Programs, U.S. Department of Education (H029D40055). Opinions expressed herein
are the author’s and do not reflect necessarily the position of the US Department of Education,
and such endorsements should not be inferred. Contact: Rob Horner (Robh@uoregon.edu),
OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (www.pbis.org), University of
Oregon, Eugene.
Page 127


   3. S/R should only be implemented (a) as safety measures (b) within a
      comprehensive behavior support plan, (c) by highly trained personnel, and (d)
      with public, accurate, and continuous data related to (1) fidelity of
      implementation and (2) impact on behavioral outcomes (both increasing desired
      and decreasing problem behaviors).

   4. School-wide positive behavior support may be an effective approach for (a)
      decreasing problem behaviors that may otherwise require S/R, (b) improving the
      fidelity with which intensive individual behavior support plans are implemented,
      and (c) improving the maintenance of behavioral gains achieved through intensive
      individual support plans.
                         School-wide Positive Behavior Support
School-wide Positive Behavior Support (SWPBS) is a systems approach to establishing
the social culture needed for schools to achieve social and academic gains while
minimizing problem behavior for all students.SWPBS is NOT a specific curriculum,
intervention, or practice, but a decision making framework that guides selection,
integration, and implementation of scientifically-based academic and behavioral practices
for improving academic and behavior outcomes for all students.A central feature of
SWPBS is implementation of behavioral practices throughout the entire school. SWPBS
defines practices that all students experience in all parts of the school and at all times of
day.
SWPBS emphasizes four integrated elements: (a) socially valued and measurable
outcomes, (b) empirically validated and practical practices, (c) systems that efficiently
and effective support implementation of these practices, and (d) continuous collection
and use of data for decision-making.
These four elements are operationalized by five guiding principles:
       Invest first in prevention to establish a foundation intervention that is empirically
       validated to be effective, efficient and sustainable.
       Teach and acknowledge appropriate behavior before relying on negative
       consequences.
       Use regular “universal screening” to identify students who need more intense
       support and provide that support as early as possible, and with the intensity
       needed to meet the student’s need.
       Establish a continuum of behavioral and academic interventions for use when
       students are identified as needing more intense support.
       Use progress monitoring to assess (a) the fidelity with which support is provided
       and (b) the impact of support on student academic and social outcomes. Use data
       for continuous improvement of support.
  Research Supporting Implementation of School-wide Positive Behavior Support
   1. Schools are able to implement SWPBS as evidenced by more than 9000 schools
      using SWPBS across the nation.
Page 128


2. Schools that implement SWPBS demonstrate reductions in problem behavior and
   improved academic outcomes.
3. Preliminary evaluation data indicate that more intensive individual student
   behavior support is perceived as more effective (and less likely to be needed)
   when SWPBS is implemented.
Page 129




           Appendix O

Planning for the Beginning and End
        of the School Year
PBS Preparation - 130



     School-wide PBS: Preparation for the Conclusion and Start of
                         the School Year12
                                    George Sugai
                              University of Connecticut
             Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supporiots
                               (April 27, 2010 revised)


This worksheet is designed to assist school-wide positive behavior support
(SWPBS) leadership teams in planning and preparing for the conclusion of the
current school year and the beginning of the next school year.

The two most important guidelines are to (a) maintain routines and expectations
until the last day of school and establish and (b) begin teaching and learning
activities on the first day of school



General Guidelines

1. Work as a team.
2. Make decisions based upon data.
3. Consider needs of all students.
4. Integrate PBS activities into other initiatives and projects.
5. Begin teaching, learning, and behavioral expectations on the first day.
6. Involve students, staff, parents, and community.
7. Maintain typical daily instructional and behavioral routines until the last day of
   school.
8. Increase use of reminders and precorrections before and after transitions.
9. Increase/maintain high rates of positive acknowledgements.
10.   Specify expected outcomes of every activity.




12
   This document was prepared, in part, by the Technical Assistance Center on Positive
Behavioral Interventions and Supports and a grant from the Office of Special Education
Programs, U.S. Department of Education (H326S980003). Opinions expressed herein do not
necessarily reflect the position of the U.S. Department of Education, and such endorsements
should not be inferred. For information about the Center, go to www.pbis.org, or for information
related to this manuscript, contact George Sugai at George.sugai@uconn.edu or Robert Horner
at Robh@uoregon.edu. When using this document, cite the Center on PBIS as the source.
PBS Preparation - 131




Preparation for CONCLUSION of School Year
 Priority
         13            Objective            Activity     Who        When
(h, m, l)



              1. Prepare students for
              next grade/teachers




              2. Prepare next
              grade/teachers for new
              students




              3. Prepare students for
              transition to new school




              4. Teach/precorrect
              expectations and routines
              for end of school year




              5. Review and reinforce
              expected behaviors




13
     High, Medium, Low priority
PBS Preparation - 132




6. Arrange events to
celebrate successes of all
student and staff



7. Survey staff on status of
school-wide PBS (e.g., EBS
survey)



8. Review and evaluation
office referral and/or
discipline data for year



9. Review/evaluate PBS
accomplishments (action
plans) for year



10. Prepare proactive
transition plans for at and
high risk students



11. Inform parents about
student, classroom, and
school successes and
accomplishments
PBS Preparation - 133
PBS Preparation - 134




Preparation for START of School Year
Priority
                      Objective              Activity     Who        When
(h, m, l)


            1. Set PBS team meeting
            schedule




            2. Review membership of
            PBS team




            3. Update written policies and
            procedures




            4. Collect data to
            establish/modify PBS action
            plan for next year




            5. Orient new staff members
PBS Preparation - 135




6. Teach expectations to new
students




7. Review/reteach
expectations with returning
students




8. Orient parents




9. Set up data management
system




10. Develop proactive
transition plan for at- or high-
risk students
PBS Preparation - 136

More Related Content

PPSX
Aed induction presentation_-_21_dec_2011
PPTX
Edu pshyc
DOC
Lesson X
PDF
Rubric for co-teaching
DOC
Mba formulacion, implementacion y evaluacion de la politica pública, de r...
DOC
Proyecto tic digaroba
PDF
Paliperidone 144598-75-4-api
PDF
195071
Aed induction presentation_-_21_dec_2011
Edu pshyc
Lesson X
Rubric for co-teaching
Mba formulacion, implementacion y evaluacion de la politica pública, de r...
Proyecto tic digaroba
Paliperidone 144598-75-4-api
195071

Viewers also liked (20)

PDF
Agt solutions solution_video_surveillance-341
DOCX
Dan OPRESCU
PDF
Guia docente dirección comercial ii ade.15.16
DOC
Más referencias para disfrutar ya del verano cultural de sevilla
PDF
Ra feb 2010 mr
DOC
CGT Domingo dóna suport a CGT TSC Garraf-Alt Penedès per la vaga indefinida d...
PPTX
Navidad en Grecia 2017 - 18
PDF
Reunión Semestral de Evaluación de Avances. Comunidad de Práctica Feria de Datos
PDF
030 Freiwilligendienste_wem sie nützen und wie der Einstie..pdf
PDF
Factor RSE en la búsqueda de trabajo
PDF
Leer para fecundar el futuro
PPT
Finance Transformation
PPTX
Longlife learning - Teaching and Learning from an international perspective
PDF
Alerts and workflow for sage partner
PDF
Senoides y fasores
DOCX
The irish-software-industry-19892008-an-overview-of-its1749
PDF
Building Resilience to Climate Change by Sustaining Ecosystem Services throug...
PPT
XBee and RFID
PPTX
Presentation e-mail
PPTX
Perifericos
Agt solutions solution_video_surveillance-341
Dan OPRESCU
Guia docente dirección comercial ii ade.15.16
Más referencias para disfrutar ya del verano cultural de sevilla
Ra feb 2010 mr
CGT Domingo dóna suport a CGT TSC Garraf-Alt Penedès per la vaga indefinida d...
Navidad en Grecia 2017 - 18
Reunión Semestral de Evaluación de Avances. Comunidad de Práctica Feria de Datos
030 Freiwilligendienste_wem sie nützen und wie der Einstie..pdf
Factor RSE en la búsqueda de trabajo
Leer para fecundar el futuro
Finance Transformation
Longlife learning - Teaching and Learning from an international perspective
Alerts and workflow for sage partner
Senoides y fasores
The irish-software-industry-19892008-an-overview-of-its1749
Building Resilience to Climate Change by Sustaining Ecosystem Services throug...
XBee and RFID
Presentation e-mail
Perifericos
Ad

Similar to Getting Started Appendices may 14_2010 (20)

DOCX
Swpbs team workbook_ver_apr_27_2010-4
PPTX
Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (PBIS), Cases from the Field
PPT
School presentation
PPT
School presentation (2)
PPT
Scotch Pbs Initial Presentation Final
PPT
Pbs Initial Presentation Final
PPTX
Behavior
PPT
SCHOOL-WIDE POSITIVE BEHAVIOR SUPPORT
PDF
Wa pbs team workbook day 1 and 2 version march 20 2013
PPTX
Hbg new teacherinduction
PPTX
Behavior
PPT
M1 D1 09 10 Small Group 7.8.09
PPT
PBS Universal Overview (Nov. 2011)
PPTX
Schoolwide pbis whatwhy how
PPTX
PBIS Presentation to Staff 2014
PPTX
Function Based Supports jul 1 2011
PPT
Behavior Einsteins, Positive Behavior Support
PPTX
PBIS in the Middle & Junior High School
PPT
Sw Pbs Presentation
PPT
Fhf pbis 09v2
Swpbs team workbook_ver_apr_27_2010-4
Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (PBIS), Cases from the Field
School presentation
School presentation (2)
Scotch Pbs Initial Presentation Final
Pbs Initial Presentation Final
Behavior
SCHOOL-WIDE POSITIVE BEHAVIOR SUPPORT
Wa pbs team workbook day 1 and 2 version march 20 2013
Hbg new teacherinduction
Behavior
M1 D1 09 10 Small Group 7.8.09
PBS Universal Overview (Nov. 2011)
Schoolwide pbis whatwhy how
PBIS Presentation to Staff 2014
Function Based Supports jul 1 2011
Behavior Einsteins, Positive Behavior Support
PBIS in the Middle & Junior High School
Sw Pbs Presentation
Fhf pbis 09v2
Ad

More from i4ppis (20)

PDF
Child developmentandtraumaguide dcp
PDF
Managing classroom behaviour
PDF
Half day school workshop attachments 2012
PDF
Friendly schools plus 16pp sample booklet a4 covers v1 small for e copy[1]
PPTX
Donna cross
PDF
Cyber safety flyer# (2)
PPT
The abc's of cbm for maths, spelling and writing
PDF
Suicide Postvention Toolkit
PDF
Case Management - AGCA Mind Matters
PDF
Teaching strategies for students with adhd
PDF
From isolation to_connection
PPT
Iva study skills presentation 2
PDF
Study smart guide iva f-1
PDF
Growing up our way
PDF
Grit the skills for success and how they are grown
PDF
Scoping study student wellbeing study 2008
PDF
Measuring student well-being_in_the_context_of_australian_schooling
PPT
Phases of escalating behaviours melbourne 24 june 2011
DOC
Spa cpd journal 2012
PPT
SWPBS Louise O'Kelly
Child developmentandtraumaguide dcp
Managing classroom behaviour
Half day school workshop attachments 2012
Friendly schools plus 16pp sample booklet a4 covers v1 small for e copy[1]
Donna cross
Cyber safety flyer# (2)
The abc's of cbm for maths, spelling and writing
Suicide Postvention Toolkit
Case Management - AGCA Mind Matters
Teaching strategies for students with adhd
From isolation to_connection
Iva study skills presentation 2
Study smart guide iva f-1
Growing up our way
Grit the skills for success and how they are grown
Scoping study student wellbeing study 2008
Measuring student well-being_in_the_context_of_australian_schooling
Phases of escalating behaviours melbourne 24 june 2011
Spa cpd journal 2012
SWPBS Louise O'Kelly

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
A Brief Introduction About Julia Allison
PPT
Data mining for business intelligence ch04 sharda
DOCX
unit 1 COST ACCOUNTING AND COST SHEET
PDF
COST SHEET- Tender and Quotation unit 2.pdf
PPT
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
PDF
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
DOCX
Business Management - unit 1 and 2
PDF
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
PPTX
HR Introduction Slide (1).pptx on hr intro
PPT
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
PPTX
job Avenue by vinith.pptxvnbvnvnvbnvbnbmnbmbh
DOCX
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx
PDF
Types of control:Qualitative vs Quantitative
PDF
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
PPTX
AI-assistance in Knowledge Collection and Curation supporting Safe and Sustai...
PPTX
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
PDF
20250805_A. Stotz All Weather Strategy - Performance review July 2025.pdf
PDF
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
PDF
kom-180-proposal-for-a-directive-amending-directive-2014-45-eu-and-directive-...
PDF
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time
A Brief Introduction About Julia Allison
Data mining for business intelligence ch04 sharda
unit 1 COST ACCOUNTING AND COST SHEET
COST SHEET- Tender and Quotation unit 2.pdf
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
Business Management - unit 1 and 2
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
HR Introduction Slide (1).pptx on hr intro
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
job Avenue by vinith.pptxvnbvnvnvbnvbnbmnbmbh
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx
Types of control:Qualitative vs Quantitative
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
AI-assistance in Knowledge Collection and Curation supporting Safe and Sustai...
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
20250805_A. Stotz All Weather Strategy - Performance review July 2025.pdf
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
kom-180-proposal-for-a-directive-amending-directive-2014-45-eu-and-directive-...
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time

Getting Started Appendices may 14_2010

  • 1. SWPBS Appendices School-wide Positive Behavior Support Appendices 1 Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports University of Oregon & Connecticut Ver. May 14 2010 1 This document is supported in part by the OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (http://pbis.org). The Center is supported by a grant from the Office of Special Education Programs, US Department of Education (H326S98003). Opinions expressed herein are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the position of the US Department of Education, and such endorsements should not be inferred.
  • 2. SWPBS Appendices APPENDICES Appendix Description A School-Wide PBS An example of one school’s implementation of SWPBS is Implementation provided: leadership team, behavior purpose statement, Example school-wide and classroom-wide expectations, teaching matrices, encouragement procedures, rule violation procedures, and progress monitoring and data systems B Committee, Group, This stand-alone activity gives leadership teams a structure Team Self-Assessment for identifying what behavioral initiatives, programs, and and Action Planning interventions are in place, and evaluating how SWPBS fits with these efforts. The specific goal is to develop an effective, efficient, and relevant continuum of positive behavior support practices and processes for all students C Effective Behavior This self-assessment is used by leadership teams to Support Self- determine staff perceptions about the status of the social Assessment Survey and behavioral climate of the school. Perceptions about supports for school-wide, classroom, nonclassroom, and individual students are assessed. All school staff are usually included. D Team Implementation Leadership teams and coaches use this self-assessment to Checklist (TIC) monitor their initial and on-going SWPBS implementation. As such, leadership teams self-manage their implementation efforts. E SWPBS Team Monthly This organizational tool is used by leadership teams, Planning Guide coaches, coordinators teams to supplement their review and action planning efforts, especially at the beginning and end of the school year. Emphasis is on first year implementation of primary intervention tier of SWPBS. The purpose F Detention and This FAQ has been developed to provide a general summary Suspension: Frequently of the implementation considerations and features of Asked Questions detention and suspension consequences. A question/answer format is used. G Functional Assessment Two self-assessment checklists are provided to enable and Behavior Support review of the components and processes of completing a Plan Checklists functional behavioral assessment and developing a behavioral intervention plan.
  • 3. SWPBS Appendices H Functional Assessment The FACTS is an instrument used to guide the completion of Checklists for Teachers a functional behavioral assessment and facilitate the and Staff (FACTS) development of a behavior intervention plan. I Emergency Prevention This primer provides general guidelines and considerations and Response for being prepared, preventing, and responding to crises and emergency situations. J Teaching Social Skills A basic and general lesson plan and examples for teaching social behavior are provided. K SWPBS and RtI A brief overview of the similar and different features of school-wide positive behavior support and responsiveness to intervention. L Selected References These references provide additional and supporting information for the contents of this workbook. M Data-based Decision Guidelines and examples for establishing efficient and Making and Office effective data-based decision making systems. Emphasis is Discipline Referrals on formalizing and enhancing office disciplinary procedures. N Restraint and Seclusion Guidelines and considerations for the appropriate and Considerations and ethical use of restraint and seclusion in the context of the SWPBS implementation of SWPBS. O Planning for the Worksheet to guide planning for the beginning and end of Beginning/Ending of the school year in a SWPBS school. the School Year
  • 4. SWPBS Appendices Appendix A School-Wide PBS Implementation Example
  • 5. SWPBS Appendices COMPONENTS AND PROCESSES OF SCHOOL-WIDE DISCIPLINE: EXAMPLE (Sugai, Colvin, Hagan-Burke, & Lewis-Palmer) The following example is for a hypothetical school (“G. Ikuma Elementary School”) and is provided to illustrate the application of the general components and processes of school-wide discipline. Example Purpose Statement G. Ikuma Elementary School G. Ikuma School is a community of learners. We are here to learn, grow, and become good citizens. Example of Behavioral Expectations At G. Ikuma School, we Respect ourselves Respect property Respect others Respect learning .
  • 6. SWPBS Appendices Example Teaching Matrix for G. Ikuma School-Wide Behavioral Expectations CLASSROOM LUNCHROOM BUS HALLWAY PLAYGROUND Use inside voice Eat your own Stay in your Stay to the Wait your turn Respect food seat right Others Raise hand to Review game answer/talk Leave space for Use inside voice Keep moving rules others to sit Recycle paper Keep feet on the Put trash in At bell return Return trays Respect floor cans equipment Property Put writing tools Use own napkin Walk on Close doors Use equipment inside desk sidewalks slowly as designed Do your best Wash your Be at stop on Use your Have a plan Respect hands time words Yourself Ask Look before you Eat healthy Sit up straight Know where act foods you’re going
  • 7. SWPBS Appendices Example Teaching Matrix for G. Ikuma Classroom-Wide Behavioral Expectations Typical Classroom-Wide Rules/Expectations Contexts/ Routines Respect Others Respect Property Respect Self Use inside voice Recycle paper Do your best All Raise hand to Put writing tools Ask answer/talk inside desk Put announcements Morning Eyes on speaker Put check by my in desk Meeting Give brief answers announcements Keep feet on floor Do own work Put homework neatly Turn in lesson on time Homework in box Turn in before Do homework lesson Touch your work only night/day before Use inside voice Put/get materials first Have plan Transition Keep hands to self Keep hands to self Go directly Raise hand or show “I Need “Assistance Card” Have plan Have materials ready Assistance” Wait 2 minutes & try Ask if unclear again Teacher Eyes on speaker Use materials as Have plan Directed Keep hands to self intended Ask Use materials as Independent Use inside voice Use time as planned intended Work Keep hands to self Ask Return with done Problem to Stop, Step Back, Stop Step Back, Stop, Step Back, Solve Think, Act Think, Act Think, Act
  • 8. SWPBS Appendices G. Ikuma Positive Reinforcement Procedures What When By Whom How Often How Many Where Whenever a student All staff Each occurrence 5-6 per day per staff Anywhere at school Positive Office provides an member Referrals exemplary display of a school-wide (see form) behavioral expectations Continuously & All staff As often as possible No maximum number Anywhere at school contingently per staff member whenever a student Verbal praise displays behavior related to school-wide behavioral expectations Continuously & All staff, but As often as possible No maximum per staff Nonclassroom contingently especially member settings: hallways, whenever a student supervisors, teaching bus loading areas, “Gotchas” displays behavior assistants, cafeteria playgrounds, (see slip) related to school-wide workers, bus drivers, common areas, expectations in & administrators cafeteria, etc. nonclassroom settings
  • 9. SWPBS Appendices Continuously & All classroom At least hourly No maximum per Classroom settings Classroom contingently teachers, teaching classroom during instruction, acknowledgements whenever a student assistants transitions, (see individual displays behavior unstructured classsroom related to school-wide activities, etc. management plans) expectations in classroom settings Whenever a All substitute teachers At any time At least 3 every hour Anywhere at school, substitute teacher but especially in “Substitute Specials” observes any student classrooms engaged in a (see slip) behavior related to school-wide expectations “Office Specials” Whenever office staff Office staff: principal, At any time At least one per Anywhere at school recognize students assistant principal, grade level per day (bumper sticker, for especially counselor, school pencil, store noteworthy behavioral secretaries, office discount coupons, growth, progress, or assistants, etc. lunch with Principal, displays etc.)
  • 10. SWPBS Appendices Procedures for Rule Violations at G. Ikuma School “Rule violations” are any behaviors that are not examples of stated school-wide behavioral expectations. Level Definition Examples Procedures Behaviors that do not Minor inappropriate 1. Inform student of rule violated require administrator language 2. Describe expected behavior involvement, do not significantly violate rights Late to class 3. Complete minor incident slip, and give to homeroom teacher of others, do not put Unprepared for 4. Debrief event and reteach appropriate school-wide behavioral others at risk or harm, or instruction Minor expectation (homeroom teacher) are not chronic Inappropriate use 5. If third incident, process as major rule violation, inform parent of gum, hats, (homeroom teacher) and develop precorrection intervention backpacks Etc.
  • 11. SWPBS Appendices Behaviors that require Profanity, verbal 1. Inform student of rule violated administrator harassment 2. Describe expected behavior involvement, significantly violate rights of others, Noncompliance/ 3. Complete office discipline referral form put others at risk or insubordination harm, or are chronic 4. Take student to office immediately Physical aggression, a. Review specifics of event while entering information into data harassment base Stealing b. Determine appropriate consequence Major “3-peats” (3 rd c. Develop plan for completing consequence occurrence of d. Inform parent minor rule violation) e. Develop precorrection intervention Etc. rd 5. If 3 major rule violation, complete referral to Student Success Team a. Complete functional behavioral assessment b. Develop behavior intervention plan Behaviors that violate Illegal substances 1. Inform student of rule violated rule district, city, and/or state Dangerous 2. Describe expected behavior policy or laws weapons 3. Complete office discipline referral form Vandalism, 4. Take student to office immediately destruction of property a. Inform parent Physical injury to b. Convene Student Success Team District others c. Review specifics of event while entering information into data Etc. base d. Determine and implement appropriate consequence 5. Develop individualized positive behavior support plan a. Complete functional behavioral assessment b. Develop behavior intervention plan
  • 12. SWPBS Appendices Example 2 Rule- Violating Definition Behavior Examples Procedures Involvement Level Major Law violating Dangerous weapons 1. Immediately report event to administrator Student, parent, law Illegals behavior requiring enforcement, school Substance possession, 2. Follow district/state policies and procedures municipal response & district truancy, vandalism, 3. Document event administrators, stealing, school staff Majors Serious rule- Repeated 1. Signal that school rule-violating behavior Student, staff person, violating behavior noncompliance, serious observed parent, school that disrupts aggression, skipping administrator 2. Restate desired/appropriate behavior teaching & learning, class, directed profanity, puts student or harassment, serious 3. Direct/escort student to office/administrator others at risk of threats, tobacco, 4. Document event with office discipline referral form harm, & requires destruction of property, administrative action 5. Enter data into system “Third” minor in 24 hours. Minors of Rule violating risk Disruptions, tardies, dress 1. Signal social behavior error has been made Student, staff person, Note behavior which code violations, teasing, homeroom teacher 2. Restate/reteach appropriate behavior requires on-going monitoring 3. Provide positive reinforcer for next display of appropriate behavior 4. Document event with office discipline referral form 5. Enter data into system Minors Rule violating Minor disruptions, off 1. Signal social behavior error has been made Student, staff behavior which does task, member 2. Restate/reteach appropriate behavior not require on-going monitoring, but 3. Provide positive reinforcer for next display of needs to be retaught appropriate behavior
  • 14. SWPBS Appendices Data Decision System for Office Discipline Referrals at G. Ikuma School At G. Ikuma School, office discipline referral data are reviewed at least monthly by school administrators and the school-wide discipline leadership team. Data are entered in a web-based computer system for easy storage, manipulation, and reporting (School-Wide Information System2). Question Data Type What is overall status of school-wide discipline in our # of office discipline referrals school? per day per month # & type of problem behaviors What problem behaviors are we seeing? (minor, major, and illegal) # & location of problem Where are problem behaviors being seen? behavior occurrences # & time of day of problem When are problem behaviors being observed? behavior occurrences # of office discipline referrals Which students are displaying problem behaviors? by student Which grades/teachers are observing problem # of office discipline referrals behaviors? by grade and teacher 2 School-Wide Information System (SWIS) is is a web-based information system designed to help school personnel to use office referral data to design school-wide and individual student interventions. SWIS was developed and is managed by the OSEP Center for Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports at the University off Oregon. For more information about SWIS , go to www.swis.org.
  • 15. SWPBS Appendices How are data entered, stored, reported, and used in your school? Data Storage Data Data Data & Question Review Type Reviewers Management Schedule System
  • 16. SWPBS Appendices Appendix B Committee/Group/Team Self- Assessment and Action Planning
  • 17. SWPBS Appendices Committee/Group Self-Assessment& Action Planning Purpose The purpose of this worksheet is to enable schools to assess and enhance the efficiency, effectiveness, and relevance of the committee and team organization of schools. Challenge Whenever a new initiative is introduced to a school, district/region, or state, the general approach is to “form a team/committee” to develop a plan for implementation. Although this initiative might be a worthwhile implementation, efforts often struggle because of a number of challenges: 1. Few resources, staff, time, etc. 2. Duplication of effort with other initiatives and efforts 3. Lack of clarity regarding purpose and outcomes 4. Lack of priority 5. Etc. Addressing the Challenge To address these challenges, schools must examine the overall organization and operation of its existing teams and committees. This self- assessment has been designed to enable school staff and educational leaders to take an inventory of its current committee and working group organization, and make enhancements that would improve the effectiveness, efficiency, and relevance with which the business and operation of the school are conducted. Guiding Principles When conducting the self-assessment and developing the action plan, keep and give highest priority to any groups that have 1. Data to support or justify their need and priority. 2. Measurable outcomes or objectives 3. Specification of their target audience 4. Alignment with the top school and/or district school-improvement goals or priorities 5. “Full” (>80%) commitment/agreement of the school staff 6. Priority and support from the administrative team
  • 18. SWPBS Appendices General Directions 1. Identify all committees, teams, groups, etc. that have social behavior improvement as part or all of their purpose. 2. Characterize the main features of each committee a. Purpose -Why was this group formed and why does it meet? b. Measurable expected outcomes/objectives- What kind and level of change, improvement, etc. is expected? c. Target audience - Who is expected to benefit from the efforts of this group? d. Meeting schedule - How often, when, and how long does this group meet? e. Membership - Who is on this committee or group? f. Relationship to school and/or district improvement goals - How do the efforts of this group relate to the short and long term priorities of the school or district? g. Priority or need - How important is this group to the school? 3. After conducting the self-assessment, evaluate how the committee organization of the school might be enhanced a. What can be eliminated? b. What can be combined? c. What might be added? d. What resources are needed to support this organizational structure? 4. Based on this new/enhanced organizational structure, develop an action plan for putting it in place.
  • 19. SWPBS Appendices Committee/Group Self-Assessment (DRAFT Sugai, April 26, 2004) Relation to School Priority Committee/ Expected Target Mission & School Purpose Schedule Membership (1 = low, Work Group Outcome Audience Improvement Plan 5 = high) (1 – low, 5 = high) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
  • 20. SWPBS Appendices Recommendations 1. What committees/work groups can we eliminate? 2. What committees/work groups can we combine? 3. What committees/work groups need to be supported for improved outcomes and sustained functioning? 4. What would an organizational chart that shows the relationship between each of our recommended committees/work groups look like?
  • 21. SWPBS Appendices Action Plan 5. What needs to be done next to act on the above recommendations? What Who How By When Other
  • 22. Working Smarter Initiative, Purpose Outcome Target Staff SIP, SID, Project, Group Involved etc Committee Attendance Committee Character Education Safety Committee School Spirit Committee Discipline Committee DARE Committee EBS Work Group Sample Teaming Matrix Initiative, Purpose Outcome Target Staff SIP/SID Committee Group Involved Attendance Increase Increase % of All students Eric, Ellen, Goal #2 Committee attendance students attending Marlee daily Character Improve Improve character All students Marlee, J.S., Goal #3 Education character Ellen Safety Improve safety Predictable response Dangerous Has not met Goal #3 Committee to threat/crisis students School Spirit Enhance school Improve morale All students Has not met Committee spirit Discipline Improve behavior Decrease office Bullies, Ellen, Eric, Goal #3 Committee referrals antisocial Marlee, Otis students, repeat offenders DARE Prevent drug use High/at-risk Don Committee drug users EBS Work Group Implement 3-tier Decrease office All students Eric, Ellen, Goal #2 model referrals, increase Marlee, Otis, Goal #3 attendance, enhance Emma academic engagement, improve grades
  • 23. Appendix C Effective Behavior Support Self- Assessment Survey Go to http://www.pbis.org/tools.htm and click on “EBS Survey”
  • 25. Effective Behavior Support Team Implementation Checklists (Monthly) School Date of Report DistrictCounty State INSTRUCTIONS: The EBS team should complete both checklists monthly to monitor activities for implementation of EBS in the school. EBS Team Members Person(s) Completing Report Checklist #1: Start-Up Activity Status:Achieved, In Progress, Not Started Complete & submitMonthly. Date: (MM/DD/YY) Establish Commitment Status: 1. Administrator’s support & active involvement. 2. Faculty/Staff support (One of top 3 goals, 80% of faculty document support, 3 year Status: timeline). Establish & Maintain Team Status: 3. Team established (representative). 4. Team has regular meeting schedule, effective Status: operating procedures. 5. Audit is completed for efficient integration of team with other teams/initiatives addressing Status: behavior support. Self-Assessment 6. Team/faculty completes EBS self-assessment Status: survey. 7. Team summarizes existing school discipline Status: data. 8. Strengths, areas of immediate focus & action Status: plan are identified.
  • 26. Establish School-wide Expectations 9. 3-5 school-wide behavior expectations are Status: defined. 10. School-wide teaching matrix developed. Status: 11. Teaching plans for school-wide expectations Status: are developed. 12. School-wide behavioral expectations taught Status: directly & formally. 13. System in place to acknowledge/reward Status: school-wide expectations. 14. Clearly defined & consistent consequences and procedures for undesirable behaviors are Status: developed. Establish Information System 15. Discipline data are gathered, summarized, & Status: reported. Build Capacity for Function-based Support 16. Personnel with behavioral expertise are Status: identified & involved. 17. Plan developed to identify and establish systems for teacher support, functional Status: assessment & support plan development & implementation.
  • 27. Checklist #2: On-going Activity Monitoring Complete & submit Monthly. Status:Achieved, In Progress, Not Started 1. EBS team has met at least monthly. Status: 2. EBS team has given status report to faculty at Status: least monthly. 3. Activities for EBS action plan implemented. Status: 4. Accuracy of implementation of EBS action Status: plan assessed. 5. Effectiveness of EBS action plan Status: implementation assessed. 6. EBS data analyzed. Status: Additional Observations/Comments/Questions:
  • 28. Action Plan for Completion of Start-Up Activities Activity Activity Task Analysis Who When a 1. Establish b. Commitment Administrator c. Top 3 goal 80% of faculty d. Three year timeline e. a. 2. Establish Team b. Representative Administrator c. Effective team operating procedures d. Audit of teams/initiatives e. a. 3. Self-Assessment EBS survey b. Discipline data Identification of c. strengths, focus Action Plan d. developed Action Plan presented to faculty e.
  • 29. a. 4. School-wide Expectations Define 3-5 school- b. wide behavioral expectations c. Curriculum matrix Teaching plans d. Teach expectations Define consequences for e. problem behavior a. 5. Establish Information System b. System for gathering useful information c. Process for summarizing d. information Process for using information for e. decision-making a. 6. Build Capacity for Function-based Support b. Personnel with behavioral expertise c. Time and procedures for d. identification, assessment, & support e. implementation
  • 30. Appendix E SWPBS Team Monthly Planning Guide
  • 31. SWPBS Team Monthly Planning Guide May 7, 2006 – Sugai3 Purpose and Use Guidelines The purpose of this guide is to give SWPBS leadership teams a supplemental organizational tool for reviewing and planning their implementation activities. A self- assessment is provided to guide teams in their action planning. The following guidelines should be considered: 1. Work as a school-wide leadership team. 2. Begin by reviewing current behavioral data4 3. Link all activities to measurable action plan outcomes and objectives. 4. Use “effectiveness, efficiency, and relevance” to judge whether an activity can be implemented with accuracy and sustained. 5. Use, review, update this planning guide at monthly team meetings. 6. Plan activities 12 months out. Definitions Measurable outcomes, data-based decision making, evidence-based SWPBS: practices, and implementation support systems Group with stakeholder representation, school level status/priority, and Team: behavior leadership responsibility Primary (“green”) prevention activities for all students, all staff, across all All Students/Staff: school settings Secondary (“yellow”) and tertiary (“red”) prevention activities for students Students w/PBS Needs: whose behavior support needs are more intensive than provided by primary prevention activities. Explicit activity that team and/or all staff will engage in and/or experience to Activity: support all students and/or students w/PBS needs. 3 OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports. Go to www.pbis.org or contact George Sugai (george.sugai@uconn.edu) for additional information. 4 E.g., discipline referrals, Team Implementation Checklist, EBS Self-Assessment, School-Wide Evaluation Tool.
  • 32. Self-Assessment to Planning Guide School ________________________________ Date________________ 5 STAFF (>80% of staff) RATING 1. State definition of SWPBS? F P N 2. State purpose of SWPBS team? F P N 3. State SW positive expectations? F P N 4. Actively supervise in non-classroom settings? F P N 5. Agree to support SWPBS action plan? F P N 6. Have more positive than negative daily interactions with students? F P N 7. Have opportunities to be recognized for their SWPBS efforts? F P N STUDENTS (>80%) 8. State SW positive expectations & give contextually appropriate behavior examples? F P N 9. Received daily positive academic and/or social acknowledgement? F P N 10. Have 0-1 major office discipline referrals for year? F P N 11. Have secondary/tertiary behavior intervention plans if >5 major office referrals? F P N TEAM 12. Representative membership? F P N 13. At least monthly meetings? F P N 14. Active administrator participation? F P N 15. Active and current action plan? F P N 16. Designated coaching/facilitation support F P N DATA 17. Measurable behavioral definitions for rule violations? F P N 18. Discipline referral or behavior incident recording form that is efficient and relevant? F P N 19. Clear steps for processing, storing, summarizing, analyzing, and reporting data? F P N 20. Schedule for monthly review of school-wide data? F P N 5 F = fully or >80% in place, P = partially in place, N = not in place or don’t know.
  • 33. SW POSITIVE EXPECTATIONS 21. Agreed to 3-5 positively stated SW expectations? F P N 22. Complete (behaviors, context, examples) lesson plan or matrix for teaching expectations? F P N 23. Schedule for teaching expectations in context to all students? F P N 24. Schedule for practice/review/boosters of SW expectations? F P N ENCOURAGING/ACKNOWLEDGING EXPECTATIONS F P N 25. Continuum or array of positive consequences? F P N 26. At least daily opportunities to be acknowledged? F P N 27. At least weekly feedback/acknowledgement? F P N RULE VIOLATIONS 28. Leveled definitions of problem behavior? F P N 29. Procedures for responding to minor violations (nonrecordable)? F P N 30. Procedures for responding to minor (non-office referable, recordable) violations? F P N 31. Procedures for responding to major (office referable) violations? F P N 32. Procedures for preventing major violations? F P N 33. Quarterly review of effectiveness of SW consequences for rule violations? F P N NONCLASSROOM SETTINGS (>80% of staff) 34. Active supervision by all staff across all settings? F P N 35. Daily positive student acknowledgements? F P N CLASSROOM SETTINGS 36. Agreement about classroom and nonclassroom managed problem behaviors? F P N 37. Linkage between SW and classroom positive expected behaviors? F P N 38. High rates of academic success for all students? F P N 39. Typical classrooms routines directly taught and regularly acknowledged? F P N 40. Higher rates of positive than negative social interactions between teacher and students? F P N 41. Students with PBS support needs receiving individualized academic & social assistance? F P N STUDENTS WITH PROBLEM BEHAVIORS 42. Regular meeting schedule for behavior support team? F P N 43. Behavioral expertise/competence on team? F P N 44. Function-based approach? F P N
  • 34. 45. District/community support? F P N 46. SW procedures for secondary prevention/intervention strategies? F P N 47. SW procedures for tertiary prevention/intervention strategies? F P N
  • 35. Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support….. All Students/Staff (“Green”) Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”) Conduct SWPBS leadership team Report to staff on status of students on meeting to review data and progress on secondary and tertiary behavioral action plan activities, and plan new intervention plans. activities, as needed. Report to staff on status of SWPBS. Monthly Review progress of students on secondary and tertiary intervention plans Nominate/review new students who might need individualized PBS Send parents progress report Weekly Daily
  • 36. Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support….. All Students/Staff (“Green”) Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”) Conduct SWPBS leadership team Report to staff on status of students on meeting to review data and progress on secondary and tertiary behavioral action plan activities, and plan new intervention plans. activities, as needed. Give report to staff on status of SWPBS. Monthly Review progress of students on secondary and tertiary intervention plans Nominate/review new students who might need individualized PBS Send parents progress report Weekly U Daily
  • 37. Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support….. All Students/Staff (“Green”) Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”) Conduct SWPBS leadership team Report to staff on status of students on meeting to review data and progress on secondary and tertiary behavioral action plan activities, and plan new intervention plans. activities, as needed. Give report to staff on status of SWPBS. Monthly Review progress of students on secondary and tertiary intervention plans Nominate/review new students who might need individualized PBS Send parents progress report Weekly Daily
  • 38. Month: _________ SWPBS Team Activities to Support….. All Students/Staff (“Green”) Students w/PBS Needs (“Yellow/Red”) Conduct SWPBS leadership team Report to staff on status of students on meeting to review data and progress on secondary and tertiary behavioral action plan activities, and plan new intervention plans. activities, as needed. Give report to staff on status of SWPBS. Monthly Review progress of students on secondary and tertiary intervention plans Nominate/review new students who might need individualized PBS Send parents progress report Weekly Daily
  • 39. Appendix F Detention and Suspension: Frequently Asked Questions
  • 40. Detentions and Suspensions: Frequently Asked Questions (Sugai, DRAFT May 28, 2002) Purpose The purpose of this FAQ is to summarize the implementation features of detention and suspension consequences. A question/answer format is used. 1. What are “detentions and suspensions” (D&S)? a. D&S are consequences given to students for displays of moderate and severe problem behavior. i. Detentions typically are taken in in-school locations. ii. Suspensions typically are taken out-of-school. b. D&S consequences alone are NOT treatment interventions because more appropriate alternative behaviors are not emphasized. i. However, they can be included as an element in a comprehensive behavior support plan if supported by assessment information. c. D&S consequences are punishment if contingent use is associated with a decrease in probability of future occurrences of problem behavior. 2. Why are D&S used in schools? a. D&S are used to i. Decrease likelihood of future occurrences (including escalations) of serious or chronic problem behavior. ii. Inhibit or prevent future occurrences of serious or chronic problem behavior by target students and their peers. iii. Encourage displays of appropriate behavior by all students. iv. Communicate seriousness of problem behavior to student and peers. v. Allow instruction for others to continue. b. D&S are usually part of series of consequence events: i. Labeling of behavior as a rule violation ii. Presentation of a verbal reprimand
  • 41. iii. Involvement of multiple individuals, for example, student, parent, referring staff member, office staff, etc. 3. How is effectiveness of D&S determined? a. Conduct regular review of data. i. #/% of students with (a) 1, (b) 2-4, and (c) 5 or more. ii. #/% by type of rule violations. iii. #/% by location. b. Strive toward i. Decreased occurrences of problem behaviors by target students are observed. ii. Decreased uses of D&S are seen across all students. iii. Increased student use of appropriate behaviors are observed. 4. Are D&S the same as “timeout?” a. Timeout is the brief (3-10 minute) contingent (dependent on) removal of the opportunity to earn positive reinforcement that is associated with a decrease in future occurrences of a behavior. i. Brief removal of student from a reinforcing time-in to non-reinforcing timeout situation. ii. Decrease in future occurrences of behavior. b. See Timeout checklist for requirements for using timeout.
  • 42. 5. What is required to increase the utility and impact of D&S? a. School-wide discipline/climate leadership committee meets regularly to review school climate and status of behavior, and effectiveness of strategies. b. Proactive school-wide and classroom-wide behavior support or discipline systems are in place. i. Desired expectations and behaviors are taught directly, actively and continuously supervised, and reinforced regularly and effectively. ii. >80% of staff are actively participating. c. Continuum of intensifying specialized behavior supports is in place. i. D&S is only an element of school-wide behavior support system. d. Measurable data decision rules are in place to assess effectiveness of D&S interventions. e. Maximum amount of time is allocated for instruction and high rates of academic success are experienced. f. Clear and consistent school-wide agreements exist about what problem behaviors are managed by administrative staff and classroom and other school staff. i. Including definitions of behaviors and criteria for earning D&S. g. Positive behavior support systems are in place, available, and implemented with high fidelity for students whose behaviors do not improve with D&S. 6. If these requirements are in place, for whom would suspensions and detentions expect to have a desirable effect? a. >80% of students would respond favorably to the use and/or threat of D&S. b. ~20% of students will require more individualized and comprehensive interventions to inhibit problem and encourage desired behavior. 7. What should be done for students who do not respond to D&S? a. Establish and refer to behavior support team with specialized behavioral skills.
  • 43. b. Establish clear decision rules for discontinuing use with students whose behaviors do not improve with the application of D&S (e.g., 3 rd assignment of detention, refer to behavior support team) c. Conduct functional behavioral assessment to determine function (what maintains occurrence of problem behavior). d. Develop school-based individualized behavior support plan based on findings from functional behavioral assessment decisions and results. e. Consider need for supports from outside the school (e.g., district, mental health, social work, medical). 8. How can use of D&S be culturally appropriate? a. Teach what behaviors are appropriate and inappropriate in school specific settings and context. b. When problem behavior occurs, determine whether these behaviors are supported and/or endorsed by students’ family, peers, and/or community. 9. What steps should be followed to administer D&S consequences? a. State behavior displayed and rule violated. b. State and deliver specific features of detention or suspension consequence. c. Inform parents. d. Debrief after consequence completed i. See guidelines for conducting debriefing e. If indicated, develop proactive behavior support plan. f. Document all above steps. 10. How should D&S be conducted? a. Supervisor should behave in a business-like, objective, non-reinforcing manner. b. Students should not be allowed to interact socially with students or adults. c. Students should not receive instructional assistance. d. Activities should be non-interactive, mundane.
  • 44. e. If student displays disruptive behaviors and is noncompliant to corrections, next planned consequence step should be followed. f. If student occurrences of problem behavior do not decrease (data decision rule), discontinue use of D&S and conduct behavior support team meeting.
  • 45. Selected References American Academy of Pediatrics (2003). Out-of-school suspension and expulsion: Policy statement. Pediatrics, 11(5), 1200-1206. American Academy of Pediatrics, Task Force on Violence (1999). The role of the pediatrician in youth violence prevention in clinical practice and at the community level. Pediatrics, 13, 173-181. Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (1999). The dark side of zero tolerance: Can punishment lead to safe schools? Phi Delta Kappan, 80, 372-382. Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (2000). School discipline at a crossroads: From zero tolerance to early response. Exceptional Children, 66, 335-347. Skiba, R. J., Peterson, R. L., & Williams, T. (1997). Office referrals and suspensions: Disciplinary intervention in middle schools. Education and Treatment of Children, 20, 295-315. University of California Los Angeles, Center for Mental Health in Schools. Mental Health in Schools Web site. Available at: http://smhp.psych.ucla.edu/aboutmhinschools.htm. Wolery, M. R., Bailey, D. B., Jr., & Sugai, G. M. (1988). Effective teaching: Principles and procedures of applied behavior analysis with exceptional students. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
  • 46. Appendix G Functional Assessment and Behavior Support Plan Checklists
  • 47. Functional Behavioral Assessment Implementation Checklist6 Step Activity Status Action Plan 1. Include key individuals in the initial Y N 1. Collect Information assessment meetings. 2. Review relevant records. Y N 3. Collect informal direct observation Y N data. 3. Interview individuals who have Y N direct experience with the student. 1. Define problem behavior in Y N observable terms. 2. Develop Summary Statement 2. Identify triggering antecedents Y N events. 3. Identify maintaining consequence Y N events. 4. Identify possible setting events. Y N 5. Develop summary statements Y N based on 1. – 4. 6. Determine level of If agreement/confidence high, go to agreement/confidence individuals have Y N Step 3. in resulting summary statement. If low, go back to Step 1. 1. Collect formal direct observation 3. Confirm Statement Summary information on behavior, antecedents, Y N & consequences. If summary statement confirmed, go 2. Determine if direct observation data Y N to Step 4. confirm summary statement. If not confirmed, go back to Step 2. 6 3-10-04. Adapted from Sugai, G., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Hagan-Burke, S. (1999-2000). Overview of the functional behavioral assessment process. Exceptionality, 8, 149-160.
  • 48. 1. Identified desired replacement 4. Develop Competing Behavior Y N behavior (long term objective). 2. Identify common reinforcing Pathway Summary consequences for desired replacement Y N behavior. 3. Identified alternative replacement behavior(s) based on function of Y N problem behavior (short term objectives). 4. Determine level of If agreement/confidence high, go to agreement/confidence in competing Y N Step 5. pathway summary. If low, repeat Step 4. 1. Select strategies &/or environmental manipulations that Y N neutralize impact of setting events. 2. Select strategies &/or 5. Identify Strategies for BIP environmental manipulations that Y N make triggering antecedents irrelevant. 3. Select strategies &/or environmental manipulations that Y N teach student skills that make problem behavior inefficient. 4. Select strategies &/or environmental manipulations that Y N make consequences for problem behavior ineffective. 5. If necessary, develop additional (beyond current school-wide) crisis Y N prevention & intervention procedures. 1. Develop scripts & routines for Y N implementation of BIP. Implementation Scripts for BIP 2. Identify who will implement BIP. Y N 6. Develop If capacity adequate, implement. If resources/capacity inadequate, 3. Determine if resources & capacity Y N obtain resources, modify context, to implement BIP available. &/or adjust implementation requirements.
  • 49. 1. Identify measures to assess impact: (a) target behaviors, (b) social Y N validation, (c) lifestyle, etc. 7. Develop Evaluation & Monitoring Procedures 2. Develop schedule for on-going Y N evaluation of implementation impact. 3. Develop procedures for assessing Y N accuracy of implementation of BIP. If adequate progress, continue. 4. Assess progress toward achieving If criteria met, develop new objective. Y N long term objective. If inadequate progress, go back to Step 1.
  • 50. Checklist for Assessing Quality of Behavior Support Planning: 7 Does Plan and Process Have These Features? 1. ____ Definition of academic and lifestyle context for behavior support 2. ____ Operational/observable/measurable description of problem behaviors 3. ____ Identification of problem routines 4. ____ Statements of hypotheses based on functional assessment information 5. Descriptions of Interventions & Supports that Consider Quality of Life ____ Health and physiology ____ Communication ____ Mobility ____ Predictability ____ Control/choice ____ Social relationships ____ Activity patterns 6. Descriptions of Preventive Interventions that Make Problem Behavior Irrelevant ____ Physical environment ____ Schedule ____ Curriculum ____ Instructional procedures 7. Descriptions of Instructional &Teaching Interventions that Make Problem Behavior Inefficient ____ Replacement skills ____ New adaptive skills 8. Descriptions of Consequence-based Interventions that Reduce Likelihood of Problem Behavior ____ Minimization of positive reinforcement to make problem behavior ineffective (extinction) ____ Minimization of negative reinforcement to make problem behavior ineffective (extinction) ____ Maximization of positive reinforcement to make appropriate behavior more effective (reinforcement) ____ If needed, aversive consequences contingent upon problem behavior (punishment) ____ Safety/emergency intervention plan for occurrences of severe problem behaviors 9. Descriptions of Evaluation & Assessment Procedures ____ Definition of information to be collected ____ Description of measurement process ____ Description of decision-making process 10. Descriptions of Procedures to Consider & Enhance Contextual Fit ____ Values & beliefs of participants ____ Skill capacity & fluency of implementers ____ Availability of supporting resources ____ Administrative support system ____ Plan in best interest of student 7 3-10-04 Adapted from Horner, R., Sugai, G., Todd, A., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (1999-2000). Elements of behavior support plans. Exceptionality, 8(3), 205-216
  • 51. Appendix H Functional Assessment Checklist for Teachers and Staff (FACTS)
  • 53. PRIMER ON CRISIS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSES (Sugai & Colvin, February 23, 1999) Although relatively infrequent events, crisis/emergency situations will occur in school settings and all school personnel should be prepared to respond efficiently and quickly. All crisis/emergency situations involve or have the potential for injury and/or property damage. Examples crisis/emergency situations include the following: Crisis/Emergency Situation Examples 1. Stranger in the building 2. Bomb/weapon threat 3. Natural disaster 4. Fire/smoke 5. Wild animal 6. Medical emergency 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
  • 54. Guiding Principles When developing, implementing, and practicing responses to crisis/emergency situations, the following guiding principles should be maintained: 1. Safety is the number one consideration. Crisis/emergency responses are not “teachable moments.” However, every effort should be made to reduce the likelihood of future crisis/emergency situations, and if they occur, emphasis should be focused on decreasing their impact. 2. Escalations are likely to run their course, and are inversely related to self- control.When and as individuals escalate, they are less and less likely to respond to efforts (external or internal) to stop or brake their behavior. The danger is further escalating an event by trying to intervene. 3. Planned responses and debriefing are required after crisis/emergency. School staff must provide follow-up supports to individuals who were involved directly and indirectly in a crisis/emergency event. This support may be information dissemination, emotional supports, administering consequences, etc. In all cases, the focus is on facilitating a smooth and speedy return to regular routines and structures. 4. Prosocial responses must be relevant, effective, efficient, and taught. With individuals or situations in which crisis/emergency situations are likely, more prosocial or acceptable alternative responses must be taught to and practiced by all individuals ahead of time. Persons involved in crisis/emergency situations must be taught alternatives to dangerous or unacceptable behaviors. These alternatives can be used to reduce the impact, intensity, and duration of the crisis/emergency situation. Selecting the prosocial response should be based on a functional assessment of the context (setting, antecedent triggers, maintaining consequences, early behavioral indicators, etc.) in which crisis/emergency situations are likely. 5. Practice...Practice…Practice. Responses to crisis/emergency situations are not easy or natural, especially, when individuals or situations are out-of-control. School personnel must practice crisis/emergency responses on a regular (e.g., monthly basis) to ensure accurate and fluent implementation.
  • 55. Prerequisites To minimize the impact of crisis/emergency situations and to maximize the effectiveness and efficiency of the response, schools should have the following prerequisites in place: 1. A comprehensive, positive behavior support system enables schools to develop and sustain a predictable, preventive, and positive environment in which communications and interactions among staff and students are effective and efficient. As a result schools are better prepared to respond when crisis/emergency situations occur. 2. A crisis response teamhas two functions: (a) insure that a structures and procedures for maintaining a safe school are in place and practiced and (b) lead staff response in the event of a crisis/emergency. 3. Strong home-school-community linkages enhance the development and responsiveness of school crisis/emergency procedures. When all significant agents (school staff, students, parents, law enforcement and emergency personnel, administrators, mental health workers, etc.) are informed, involved, and prepared, crisis/emergency responses can be more efficient and effective. 4. High rates of student academic and social successpromotes prosocial personal and interpersonal behavior and self-confidence. As a result, the likelihood and impact of crisis/emergency situations can be reduced, and the response is likely to be more efficient and effective. 5. Clearly written policy and procedures increases understanding, communications, and accountability. In addition, responses to crisis/emergency situations can be more efficient and effective. 6. Regular, supervised opportunities to practicecrisis/emergency responses are absolutely essential. With practice, staff and students are more likely to respond accurately, quickly, and without hesitation.
  • 56. A Generic Response Sequence Although the behavioral appearance of each step will vary for different crisis/emergency situations, the following response sequence should serve as the basis for responses to all crisis/emergency situations. 1. Assessthe situation. Collect information about who is involved, where the problem is, what is happening, etc. 2. Request help/assistance. Always work with another person or team of individuals. 3. Monitor/defuse/control crowd. Respond as a team, and let individuals with crisis/emergency training and practice take over. 4. Let help/experts take over. Give them necessary information, and assist as required. 5. Follow-up. Debrief immediately. Focus on reviewing and evaluating the event, reducing impact of event, facilitating transitions, and preparing plans to reduce possibility and/or impact of future events.
  • 57. Other Provisions In addition to the above generic sequence, the following provisions should be established: 1. “Safe” areas or locations where individual or groups should gather or evacuate to when a crisis/emergency occurs. 2. Clear roles and responsibilities for key personnel who respond to crisis/emergency situations. 3. Clear, “fool-proof” communications systems so information can be distributed or obtained quickly, accurately, and with high reliability. 4. Means of securing immediate external support from essential community agencies (e.g., paramedics, fire personnel, law enforcement, poison control). 5. Procedures for securing or “locking down” a classroom or school to isolate students and staff from dangerous situations or individuals. 6. Instructions for unique situations which require specific responses beyond the generic sequence (e.g., handling blood, poisoning or drug abuse, chemical spills). 7. Procedures for accounting for whereabouts of all students and staff. 8. Procedures for documenting dangerous and potentially dangerous situations.
  • 58. Process for School Investigations (Sugai, March 19, 1998) When significant events occur, information gathering and action planning typically follow. These investigations are important to insure accurate documentation, consistent communications, and informed decision-making. Like the process for responding to crisis/emergency situations, investigations should be conducted in a planned, systematic, and business-like manner. In addition, environments that have clear written policies and operate with proactive (positive/preventative) procedures are more likely to conduct effective and efficient investigations. The following generic steps should be considered when conducting investigations: Steps 1. Assess for injuries, property damage, potential for danger to self or others, or other safety concerns. 2. Insure accountability by (a) checking policies and procedures and (b) consulting with experts. 3. Inform others of investigation: (a) parents, (b) schools, (c) agencies, etc. 4. Interview key players by (a) informing them of their rights, obligations, privileges; (b) requesting information; (c) giving choices; and (d) establishing and following-through with bottom line. 5. Follow through with (a) consequences and (b) actions. 6. Follow up by (a) documenting the event and (b) debriefing with primary participants.
  • 59. School Crisis/Emergency Response Checklist and Action Planning8 (Sugai, February 23, 1999) Date of Assessment: _________________ Person(s) Completing Assessment: _________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Check status of each item (in place, partially in place, not in place). In Place Status Fully Partially Not Item 1. Crisis response team 2. Home-school-community linkage 3. Proactive school-wide discipline system 4. High rates of academic & social success 5. Clear written policy & procedures 6. Regular, supervised opportunities to practice 7. Posted generic response sequence 8. Designated safe areas 9. Clear roles & responsibilities of key personnel 10. Clear fool-proof communication system 11. Means of securing immediate external support 12. Procedures for securing or locking down classroom or school 13. Posted instructions for unique situations 14. Procedures for accounting for whereabouts of all students & staff 15. Systematic process for conducting investigations 16. Clear policy on physical interventions 17. Procedures for documenting dangerous & potentially dangerous situations 8 Complete checklist at least quarterly.
  • 60. School Crisis/Emergency Response Action Plan 1. Overall status High Medium Low a. b. 2. List three major strengths c. 3. List three major a. areas in need of improvement b. 4. Circle the area most in need of c. improvement Step 1: Who:________________ When:_______________ Step 2: Who:________________ When:_______________ Step 3: Who:________________ When:_______________ 5. Develop an Action Plan for circled area Step 4: Who:________________ When:_______________ Step 5: Who:________________ When:_______________ Step 6: Who:________________ When:_______________ 6. Schedule next Who:________________________ When: _______________ self assessment
  • 61. References Carr, E. G., Levin, L., McConnachie, G., Carlson, J. L., Kemp, D. C., & Smith, C. E. (1994). Communication-based intervention for problem behavior: A user’s guide for producing positive change. Baltimore, MD: Brookes. Dwyer, K., Osher, D., & Warger, C. (1998). Early warning, timely response: A guide to safe schools. Washington, DC: US Department of Education. Furlong, M. J., & Morrison, G. M. (1994). School violence and safety in perspective. School Psychology Review, 23, 139-261. Goldstein, A. P., Palumbo, J., Striepling, S., & Voutsinas, A. M. (1995).Break it up: A teacher=s guide to managing student aggression. Champaign, IL: Research Press. Schneider, T., Walker, H., & Sprague, J. (2000). Safe school design: A handbook for educational leaders.ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Management. University of Oregon, Eugene. Stephens, R. D. (1995). Safe schools: A handbook for violence prevention. Bloomington, IN: National Educational Service. Sprague, J. R., Colvin, G., Irvin, L. K., & Stieber, S. (1997). The Oregon School Safety Survey. Institute on Violence and Destructive Behavior at the University of Oregon, Eugene. Walker, H., Colvin, G., & Ramsey, E. (1995). Antisocial behavior in public school: Strategies and best practices. Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole. Walker, H., Irvin, L., & Sprague, J. K. (1998). Violence prevention and school safety: Issues, problems, approaches, and recommended solutions. Oregon School Study Council, 41(1), 1-20. Watson, R. S., Poda, J. H., Miller, C. T., Rice, E. S., & West, G. (1990). Containing crisis: A guide to managing school emergencies. Bloomington, IN: National Educational Service.
  • 62. Appendix J Social Skills Lesson Planning
  • 63. Teaching Social Skills: Strategies and Examples George Sugai & Brandi Simonsen University of Connecticut Center for Behavioral Education and Research August 10, 2008 SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN INSTRUCTIONS Develop a social skills lesson by completing the following steps: 1. Start with your completed the Expected Behavior Matrix. 2. Choose 1 expected behavior and 1 routine (i.e., 1 box within the matrix). 3. Describe how you would teach the expected, rule-following behavior(s) by completing the attached lesson plan for teaching 1 expectation within 1 routine.
  • 64. Social Skill Lesson Plan Name of Expectation (Rule) Routine Operational Definition of Expected Behavior Within Specific Routine Clearly Stated Behavioral Teaching Objective learner, behavior, conditions, criteria) Conditions: Learner: Behavior: Criteria: List All Materials Required to Teach Lesson Teaching Examples Positive Examples Negative Examples
  • 66. Lesson Activities Model (Demonstrating expected behavior within indicated routine) Lead (Prompting and guided practice) Test (Checking for understanding for each student)
  • 67. Follow-Up Activities During and After Lesson Prompting Expected Behavior Reinforcing Appropriate Behavior Correcting Inappropriate Behavior Monitoring and Actively Supervising Student Behavior Collecting Data and Evaluating Student Behavior
  • 68. SUPPORT Social Skill Lesson Plan (Sample) NAME OF EXPECTATION (RULE) Be Respectful ROUTINE Classroom OPERATIONAL DEFINITION OF EXPECTED BEHAVIOR WITHIN SPECIFIC ROUTINE Students show respect in the classroom by raising their hands before speaking, encouraging and allowing peers to participate, and accepting feedback. CLEARLY STATE BEHAVIORAL TEACHING OBJECTIVE(S) Include 4 parts: learner(s), behavior(s), condition(s), and criteria Immediately following instruction, students will be able to (a) describe what respectful classroom behavior “looks like” and (b) correctly depict a positive example of respectful classroom behavior (in a skit) with 95% accuracy. Following instruction, during five sampled teacher directed activities, students will raise their hands and wait to be called to ask or answer a question on an average of 90% of opportunities. Following instruction, during five sampled group activities, students will encourage and allow peers to participate (as evidenced by all students contributing to discussion and group outcomes) across 85% of opportunities. Following instruction, when staff members present feedback, students will use calm language to thank the staff and ask questions on 80% of opportunities across 5 days. LIST ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO TEACH THE LESSON A script for role plays for three students to model respectful classroom behavior Two response cards for each student, one with a + written on it and one with a – written on it A blank script for each student that prompts them to write the definition of respectful classroom behavior on the front and develop a skit to illustrate respectful classroom behavior inside Data collection sheets to monitor and evaluate student behavior following instruction POSITIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES NEGATIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES When a teacher is sharing information, Jorge A teacher is delivering a lesson, and Jen quietly raises his hand and waits for the stands up and shouts out, “I don’t get teacher to call on him before asking a it.” When the teacher says, “Jen raise relevant question. your hand if you have a question,” Jen screams louder. During a group activity, Jessica asks her peers Toby is assigned to a group with three what they think about her suggestion. When classmates. He immediately shouts that one peer doesn’t respond, she specifically he doesn’t want Brian in his group. asks that peer for feedback. When Brian sits down, Toby refuses to
  • 69. POSITIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES NEGATIVE TEACHING EXAMPLES work with Brian. Jeff’s teacher tells him that his paper was Teresa’s teacher asks her to correct a well organized, but he needs to go back and math problem on her homework correct spelling errors. Jeff says thank you, assignment. Teresa rolls her eyes and gets a dictionary, and starts working. throws her paper away as she walks back to her desk. When Bobbi is reminded to raise her hand When the teacher asks Diane to walk instead of talking out, she calmly raises her slowly on her way to line up, Diane hand and waits to be called on to share her continues to walk very quickly (fast response. enough that she’s almost jogging) to the front of the line. When the teacher explains the roles that As the teacher is giving instructions for each group member may play, Marco listens group work, Charles is looking around quietly. When she joins her peers in the the room and making eye contact with group, she asks who wants to play which role peers he wants in his group. When they in the group and engages her peers in a sit down, he doesn’t know what roles conversation to choose roles. each person should take, but he tells everyone, “I’m the leader.” LESSON ACTIVITIES MODEL (Indicate how you will demonstrate rule following behavior within the indicated routine) Before teaching the lesson, the teacher will coach three students who have positive social status to engage in three brief role plays that demonstrate respectful classroom behavior during three classroom activities: teacher directed instruction (i.e., raising hand to ask a question), during group work (i.e., asking all peers for their opinion), and when accepting feedback (i.e., saying thank you). LEAD (Indicate how you will provide guided practice) The teacher will read and briefly act out each positive and negative example. All students will be asked to identify whether the example is positive or negative (by holding up a response card with a + or a – written on it). If the example is positive, individual students will be asked to identify how the example illustrated respectful classroom behavior. If the example is negative, the students will be asked to state how the student should have behaved in that situation. TEST (Indicate how you will check for the understanding of each student) Each student will be asked to write a brief skit that demonstrates respectful classroom behavior. Then, students will be given a blank script booklet that prompts them to write the definition of respectful classroom behavior on the front and then write the script for the skit inside. The teacher will review the scripts and choose the best skits for the class to act out the following day during a review session.
  • 70. FOLLOW UP ACTIVITIES (DURING AND AFTER THE LESSON) PROMPTING EXPECTED BEHAVIOR Before each classroom activity, the teacher will provide a specific verbal prompt about how students can show respect during that activity (e.g., before teacher directed instruction, the teacher will say, “To show respect, remember to raise your hand to ask or answer a question.”) Rules will also be posted within the classroom (a visual prompt). REINFORCING APPROPRIATE BEHAVIOR When a student successfully demonstrates respectful classroom behavior, the teacher will provide specific and contingent praise (e.g., the teacher may say, “Thank you for showing respect by raising your hand.”) Also, for each specified period of time students demonstrate respectful classroom behavior, students will earn points toward their class-wide token economy. CORRECTING INAPPROPRIATE BEHAVIOR If a student does not demonstrate respect, the teacher will provide an error correction (e.g., “Before you share, please raise your hand and wait for me to call on you. Try again.”) If a student continues to make the same behavioral error, the teacher will provide additional instruction in how to demonstrate respect. MONITORING/SUPERVISING STUDENT BEHAVIOR The classroom teacher and staff will actively supervise students across classroom activities. They will take data to determine if students are meeting behavioral objectives. o For a period of five days following the lesson, the teacher will take data during a sample of teacher directed activities (by making a tally next to each student who raises his/her hand and calls out) to determine if students raise their hand on 90% of opportunities. o For five days following instruction, the teacher will take data during a sample of group activities and note which students participate (and provide specific feedback to students who are encouraging their peers to participate) to determine if all students are participating during 85% of opportunities. o For five days following instruction, the teacher will track how students respond each time they are presented with feedback to determine if students accept feedback appropriately (saying thank you and calmly asking questions) on 80% of opportunities. If needed, the teacher will assign staff to posts in the classroom and map out walking paths to ensure that staff are moving around, scanning the environment, and interacting with students (the three behaviors involved in active supervision). COLLECTING AND EVALUATING STUDENT DATA Data will be summarized across days and students. If students meet criteria specified in instructional objectives (as described in the previous section), the teacher will continue to actively supervise students and reinforce respectful behavior. If students do not meet criteria, the teacher will re-teach the lesson using different examples and increase reinforcement for respectful behavior.
  • 71. GENERIC SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN (Sugai, May 15, 2002) Name of Skill: Teacher Wording Examples Cumulative Review: Introduction (Outcome): Skill Components/Variations (behaviors): Model/Show: Role Play/Practice: Review: Test: Homework: Next Lesson:
  • 72. GENERIC SOCIAL SKILLS LESSON PLAN: EXAMPLE (Sugai, 5/15/02) Name of Skill:Conflict Management: Stop, Think, & Act Teacher Wording Examples Cumulative Review: + Two students want to use the same computer. Yesterday, we began to learn about a conflict management strategy called Stop, Think, & Act. + Student and teacher have different Before we could learn the strategy we had to answers. define “conflict.” What is a conflict? (when two or + Child and parent want to watch more people disagree about something) different tv shows. + Two students disagree about a game rule Introduction (Outcome): Today, we are going to learn the first step in the Stop, Think, & Act strategy….Stop. Skill Components/Variations (behaviors): + Take a deep breathe After you have determined that a conflict exists, + Say “I think we don’t agree.” there are many different ways to Stop…some of - Call the other person an arguer them are okay and others are not okay. + Ask to discuss later Can you give some examples of correct ways to Stop? + Ask an adult to help - Throw something -/+ Walk away without saying anything + Others? Model/Show: + Two students want to use the same computer (Say: We both want to use Watch me. When I’m done, I’ll ask you to tell me the same computer at the same time. how I stopped when there was a conflict. We have a conflict.) + Student and teacher have different answers. Ask the teacher for correct answer.
  • 73. Role Play/Practice: + Child and parent want to watch different tv shows. Now it’s your turn to show how to Stop when you discover that a conflict exists. What was the + One student accidentally bumps conflict? How did you Stop? another students causing juice to spill on floor. Neither student wants to pay for the juice. + Two students disagree about whether a foul was committed during a game. Review: So, what have we learned so far? + Three steps for managing a conflict are Stop, Think, & Act + A conflict is a disagreement between two people, + The first step is to Stop before you Act, and there are many ways to Stop. Test: + You and another student want the last desert in the cafeteria. Here are some new examples. Describe what the conflict is, and tell/show me how you would stop in + You say that you finished your each of these situations. assignment and the teacher says that you didn’t. + You say that another student left the door unlocked. The other student says you left it unlocked. Homework: Read a story or watch a tv show. Identify when two Worksheet people are having a conflict. If they stopped the correct way, describe how. If they didn’t Stop the correct way, describe how they could have stopped correctly. Next Lesson: The next time we meet, we will review your homework findings, and we will learn about how to Act after you Stop.
  • 74. Teaching Social Skills at the Large Group Level: “Cool Tool of the Week” George Sugai University of Oregon Eugene, Oregon and Kathy Giesen and Betsy Fernandez Shasta Middle School Bethel School District Eugene, Oregon The Cool Tool is a social skills training format used to teach school-wide and classroom level behavioral expectations or rules. The following material includes examples that were developed and used at Shasta Middle School to improve student social behaviors.
  • 75. TO: All Shasta Middle School Staff FROM: Special Services Team RE: Social skill of the week (A.k.a.: Cool Tool of the Week) DATE: March 4, 1996 Overview and Purpose In an effort to improve the social skills of all students at Shasta Middle School, the EBS and special services teams have developed a two pronged approach to school-wide social skills instruction. The first prong involves the systematic and comprehensive training of our school- wide rules and expectations. We will be proposing some activities to try this year and a larger- scale implementation at the beginning of next year. Information about this activity is forthcoming, and will involve an intensive and school-wide effort. The purpose of this note is to describe the second prong which is less formal but focuses on the use of brief tactics for addressing specific problem behaviors. We will focus on teaching and encouraging kids (a) how to get adult or peer attention (e.g., instead of using harassment, disruptions, and arguing), (b) how to get help for difficult tasks and responsibilities (e.g., instead of displays of acting out and noncompliance to escape work), and (c) how to succeed in the classroom (e.g., instead of being late, unprepared, or absent). This activity will be called “Cool Tool of the Week” and will have the following features: A brief strategy to promote a specific social skill (i.e., “Cool Tool”) will be e-mailed to each staff member every other Monday morning. A hardcopy also will be distributed. The description of the strategy will include (a) the name of the Cool Tool, (b) a set of examples that illustrate the Cool Tool, (c) a recommended activity for discussing the Cool Tool, and (d) a list of strategies for promoting the Cool Tool throughout the day. All staff will be asked to assist us by spending 15 or so minutes at the beginning of each week to present the Cool Tool lesson, and to give positive attention to kids who display the Cool Tool throughout the day and week. The special services team and building administrators will assume responsibility for regularly reminding staff to implement the Cool Tool lessons and strategies and acknowledging staff participation and success. The special services team will be available to co-present lessons, or to assist in the development of other supporting activities. This approach is designed to assist the majority of students in classrooms...it will take more to assist kids with more chronic problem behaviors. Also, we must remember that many kids have the Cool Tool, but require extra practice and feedback to encourage more use of the Cool Tool at the correct times and places. The special services team will assume responsibility for encouraging staff members to share successful materials and examples and for collecting and organizing this information.
  • 76. Cool Tools The following is a sample of the skills that we are thinking about developing into lessons. A draft of the first Cool Tool of the Week lesson also is attached. Please let us know if you have other skills that you would like to have included. Getting Help (how to ask for assistance on difficult tasks) (draft attached) Buddy Builders (how to get attention from peers) Teacher Attention (how to get attention from adults) Being There (how to get to class on time) Being Ready (how to be ready for class activities) Getting There (how to get to school on time) General Teaching Strategies Regardless of the Cool Tool being taught, you can increase the effectiveness and efficiency of your lessons by incorporating the following teaching strategies into your interactions with students: Focus on the presentation of positive examples of the use of a Cool Tool.Avoid spending too much time on inappropriate behaviors and the negative consequences for those behaviors. When a student displays inappropriate behavior, give attention to other students who are engaged in appropriate use of Cool Tool. Whenever possible, use positive examples from your own classroom and school experiences to illustrate the application of a Cool Tool. Throughout the day, focus on giving positive feedback to kids who display the Cool Tool. Positive feedback might consist of social attention, positive office referral, verbal praise, extra privilege, and the like. If the student has never displayed the Cool Tool behavior (i.e., doesn’t “know” how), provide teacher demonstrations or models of the tool, use multiple examples of the tool, and provide lots of opportunities for the student to practice the tool. If the student has displayed the Cool Tool behavior but not at the right times, in the right places, or at high enough rates, arrange opportunities for the student to use the Cool Tool, and be sure to provide positive acknowledgements when the tool is used. The Cool Tool strategy is designed for the general student body....not the individual student with severe problem behavior. So, avoid basing the success or failure of the Cool Tool strategy on the response of the student who displays the most severe problem behavior.
  • 77. COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK Skill Name Getting Help (How to ask for assistance for difficulty tasks) Teaching Examples 1. When you’re working on a math problem that you can’t figure out, raise your hand and wait until the teacher can help you. 2. You and a friend are working together on a science experiment but you are missing a piece of lab equipment, ask the teacher for the missing equipment. 3. You are reading a story but you don’t know the meaning of most of the words, ask the teacher to read and explain the word. Kid Activity 1. Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they needed help to complete a task, activity, or direction. 2. Ask students to indicate or show how they could get help. 3. Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for inappropriate responses. After the Lesson (During the Day) 1. Just before giving students difficult or new task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell you how they could get help if they have difficulty (precorrection). 2. When you see students having difficulty with a task (e.g., off task, complaining), ask them to indicate that they need help (reminder). 3. Whenever a student gets help the correct way, provide specific praise to the student.
  • 78. COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK Skill Name Teacher Attention (how to get attention from adults) Teaching Examples 1. You want to let the teacher know that you are done with your in-class social studies assignment, so you go to the teacher’s desk and ask the teacher to check your answers. 2. Your group is done with its art activity and you’d like to ask the teacher for permission to visit the library, so you raise your hand. When the teacher sees your raised hand, the teacher asks what you want. You say your group is done with their project and would like permission to go the library. 3. You are walking down the hall with your friends and you see one of your teachers. When you get close to the teacher, you say “hi” and introduce your friends. 4. Your teacher is talking to another teacher before school. You want to ask your teacher about an assignment. You stand within view so your teacher knows you are waiting. Kid Activity 1. Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they wanted attention from an adult. 2. Ask students to indicate or show how they could get attention from an adult. 3. Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for inappropriate responses. After the Lesson (During the Day) 1. Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell you how they could get your attention (precorrection). 2. When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get your attention, wait until they are quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get your attention (reminder). 3. Whenever a student gets your attention the correct way, provide specific praise to the student.
  • 79. COOL TOOL OF THE WEEK Skill Name Buddy Builders (how to get attention from peers) Teaching Examples 1. Your best friend is talking to two other kids. You want to talk to him, so you wait for a break in their conversation, and you say your friend’s name. 2. You are done with your written work and are getting bored. You wait until your friend is done with hers written work, and say “what’s happening?” 3. Everyone is listening to a student tell about a recent music concert. You want to say that you went to the same concert, so you look for someone who isn’t listening to the student, and begin telling her about the concert. Kid Activity 1. Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they wanted attention from a peer/kid. 2. Ask students to indicate or show how they could get attention from a peer/kid. 3. Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for inappropriate responses. After the Lesson (During the Day) 1. Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell you how they could get attention from a peer/kid (precorrection). 2. When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get your attention, wait until they are quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get attend from a peer/kid (reminder). 3. Whenever a student gets attention from a peer/kid the correct way, provide specific praise to the student.
  • 80. SKILL OF THE WEEK Skill Name Being Ready (how to be ready for class activities) Teaching Examples 1. Class is about ready to begin, you get out the materials you will need for your first assignment. Before you sit down or visit with your friends, you collect your binder, pencil, and book. 2. The teacher gives you a break between math and science; so you go to your locker or open your bag and get out the book, folder, journal, or whatever you need for the next class. After getting ready, you visit with your friends. 3. You have all the things you will need from your bag to complete your work, so you put your bag on the floor to give you more space on your desk. Kid Activity 1. Ask 2-3 students to give an example of a situation in which they need to be ready for class activities. 2. Ask students to indicate or show how they could get ready for a class activity. 3. Encourage and support appropriate discussion/responses. Minimize attention for inappropriate responses. After the Lesson (During the Day) 1. Just before students are about done with a task, direction, or activity, ask them to tell you how they could get ready for the next class or activity (precorrection). 2. When you see students are using inappropriate ways to get ready, wait until they are quiet, then ask them to tell you a more appropriate way to get ready for that class or activity (reminder). 3. Whenever a student gets ready for a class or activity the correct way, provide specific praise to the student.
  • 81. “COOL TOOL”Review Activity TO: Shasta Middle School Staff FROM: Kathy, John, Betsy, and Susan RE: Review Activity for Cool Tool DATE: May 17, 1996 We are pleased with everyone’s efforts to enhance student awareness about the importance of social skills at Shasta Middle School. Students are discussing “Cool Tools” with us, we have been able to incorporate “Cool Tools” in our discussions with students who have displayed problem behaviors, and we have seen staff integrating “Cool Tools” into their daily activities. To date, four social skills (a.k.a. “Cool Tools”) have been introduced: Getting Help, Getting There, Asking for Help, Teacher Attention Rather than introducing a new skill on Monday (5/20), we thought it would be helpful to have a fun review activity. We call it the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day.” In general, students will be asked to guess the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day” based on hints provided by staff. Here are the details: On Monday 5/20 you will receive the name of the Mystery Cool Tool. Do NOT tell any student the name of the skill. During the first period of the day (5/20), read/tell the students the following (5 minutes): Today we are going to play a game to help us review what we have learned so far, called the “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day,” All staff members know what the Cool Tool is, and will acknowledge you when they see the skill being used....but they won’t name the skill. Your job is to figure out which skill is the “Mystery Tool of the Day.” Tomorrow morning, we’ll have a short class discussion, and decide what we think the mystery skill is. We’ll submit this name to the office. I’ve heard that the office will provide some kind of special acknowledgment for those classrooms that guess correctly.
  • 82. Data Dec 82 Throughout the day in your classroom, in the hallways, in the cafeteria, etc., look for kids who display the “Mystery Cool Tool,” and acknowledge that you saw it. For example, you might say the following: (a) That was it...I saw you doing the Mystery Cool Tool of the Day! (b) Cool Tool, right there! and (c) You did it! Hmmm, I wonder what Mystery Cool Tool that was? Do NOT name the skill, just acknowledge its occurrence. We will be out acknowledging students and asking them if they have any idea about what the skill might be. During the first period of the next day (5/21), ask students to (a) nominate what they believe was the Mystery Skill of the Day, (b) describe where they were and what they were doing at the time, and (c) arrive at a consensus (or vote) for one nomination that can be sent to the office. After a choice has been made, have one of your students deliver the class nomination to the office on the form below. Thank you, in advance, for you efforts and participation. --------------------------------------------Tear along line---------------------------------------------------- “Mystery Cool Tool of the Day:” Nomination Form Date __________________ Teacher’s Name ______________________ House __________________________ Classroom ___________ We believe that the Mystery Cool Tool of the Day is _____________________________. Teacher’s Signature: _______________________________ Student Representative Signature: _________________________
  • 83. Data Dec 83 Appendix K SWPBS and Responsiveness to Intervention
  • 84. Data Dec 84 School-Wide Positive Behavior Support and Response to Intervention by George Sugai, Ph.D. University of Connecticut, Storrs OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports Center for Behavioral Education and Research Schools are complex environments where the collective skills, knowledge, and practices of a culture are taught, shaped, encouraged, and transmitted. Teachers are challenged to provide effective and explicit instruction that maximizes students’ acquisition of concepts, skills, and information, and students are challenged to remain attentive, responsive, and engaged to benefit from these instructional opportunities. These formidable goals are enriched and complicated by learners with diverse learning histories, unique strengths and limitations, and defining cultural influences. In addition, schools, families, and students continually must adapt to maximize benefits from the school experience. In recent years, achieving these goals has required that schools a) increase instructional accountability and justification, b) improve the alignment between assessment information and intervention development, c) enhance use of limited resources and time, d) make decisions with accurate and relevant information, e) initiate important instructional decisions earlier and in a more timely manner, f) engage in regular and comprehensive screening for successful and at-risk learners, g) provide effective and relevant support for students who do not respond to core curricula, and g) enhance fidelity of instructional implementation (Sugai, 2007). In response, a general problem-solving framework, Response to Intervention (RTI), has evolved to address these need statements. Although not new or limited to special education, RTI initially appeared as policy in the Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004 (IDEA 2004), and it has conceptual and empirical foundations in, for example, applied behavior analysis, curriculum-based measurement, precision teaching, pre-referral intervention, teacher assistance teaming, diagnostic prescriptive teaching, data-based decision making, early universal screening and intervention, behavioral and instructional consultation, and team-based problem solving (Sugai, 2007). RTI has been described as an approach for establishing and redesigning teaching and learning environments so that they are effective, efficient, relevant, and durable for all students, families, and educators (Sugai, 2007). Specifically, RTI is shaped by six defining characteristics (Brown-Chidsey & Steege, 2005; Christ, Burns, & Ysseldyke, 2005; Fuchs & Deschler, 2007; Fuchs & Fuchs, 2007; Fuchs, Mock, Morgan, & Young, 2003; Gresham, 2005; Gresham et al., 2005; Kame’enui, 2007; National Association of State Directors of Special Education, 2006; Severson, Walker, Hope-Doolittle, Kratochwill, & Gresham, 2007): 1. Universal screening: Learner performance and progress should be reviewed on a regular basis and in a systematic manner to identify students who are a) making adequate progress, b) at some risk of failure if
  • 85. Data Dec 85 not provided extra assistance, or c) at high risk of failure if not provided specialized supports. 2. Data-based decision making and problem solving: Information that directly reflects student learning based on measurable and relevant learning criteria and outcomes should be used to guide decisions regarding instructional effectiveness, student responsiveness, and intervention adaptations and modifications. 3. Continuous progress monitoring: Student progress should be assessed on a frequent and regular basis to identify adequate or inadequate growth trends and support timely instructional decisions. 4. Student performance: Priority should be given to using actual student performance on the instructional curriculum to guide decisions regarding teaching effectiveness and learning progress. 5. Continuum of evidence-based interventions: An integrated and linked curriculum should be available such that: a. A core curriculum is provided for all students; b. A modification of this core is arranged for students who are identified as nonresponsive, and c. A specialized and intensive curriculum is developed for students whose performance is deemed nonresponsive to the modified core. Elements of this continuum must have empirical evidence to support efficacy (intervention is linked to outcome), effectiveness (intervention outcomes are achievable and replicable in applied settings), relevant (intervention can be implemented by natural implementers and with high fidelity), and durable (intervention implementation is sustainable and student outcomes are durable). 6. Implementation fidelity: Team-based structures and procedures are in place to ensure and coordinate appropriate adoption and accurate and sustained implementation of the full continuum of intervention practices. Although most RTI implementation efforts have focused on academic curriculum and instructional practices (e.g., early literacy and numeracy), applications of the RTI framework also are represented in the implementation of School-wide Positive Behavior Support (SWPBS) practices and systems (Sugai et al., 2000). A comparison of RTI applications in early literacy and social behavior reveals similarities within core RTI characteristics (see Figure 1).
  • 86. Data Dec 86 Figure 1: Comparison of RTI in Literacy and Social Behavior SOURCE: Sugai, G., (August 1, 2007). School-wide positive behavior support and responsiveness-to-intervention. Keynote presentation to and paper for the Southern Maryland PBIS Summer Regional Conference. Waldorf, MD. Reprinted with permission. A particularly important feature of SWPBS and RTI is an emphasis on prevention (see Figure 2), which has its roots in public health and disease control and occurs at three levels: 1. Primary tier prevention: All students are exposed to a core social behavior curriculum to prevent the development of problem behavior and to identify students whose behaviors are not responsive to that core. 2. Secondary tier prevention: Supplemental social behavior support is added to reduce the current number and intensity of problem behavior. 3. Tertiary tier prevention: Individualized and intensive behavior support is developed to reduce complications, intensity, and/or severity of existing problem behavior. This three-tiered prevention logic has direct application to both academic and social behavior supports (Kame’enui, 2007; Lane et al., 2007; O'Shaughnessy, Lane, Gresham, & Beebe-Frankenberger, 2003; Sadler & Sugai, 2009).
  • 87. Data Dec 87 Figure 2: Integration of Academic and Social Behavior Three-Tiered Continuum of Behavior Support SOURCE: Sugai, G. (June 23, 2001). School climate and discipline: School-wide positive behavior support. Keynote presentation to and paper for the National Summit on Shared Implementation of IDEA. Washington, DC. Reprinted with permission. Although conceptualized as a three-tiered framework, this continuum of evidence-based practices of RTI and SWPBS applications is best represented as a blended integration that has relevance and application across the range of teaching and learning environments that exist in schools and communities. In Figure 3, examples of specific school-based behavioral interventions are organized in the traditional three-tiered framework but also are aligned along this integrated curriculum. If done properly, each practice should have decision rules for determining movement up and down the continuum based on student performance. The specialized nature of interventions and breadth of the continuum will vary by developmental level (e.g., early childhood/preschool, elementary, middle, high school), environmental constraints (e.g., small vs. large school), alternative programming (e.g., correctional school, hospital setting), and so on. For example, an intensive program for students with significant emotional and behavioral disorders might have a structured level system and token economy for all students that involves hourly social behavior progress monitoring and feedback associated with school-wide social skills (primary tier); a peer- or adult-based individualized behavioral contracting system with continuous prompting, monitoring, and feedback (secondary tier); and cognitive-behavioral counseling sessions every morning that are linked to psychopharmacological and person-centered process planning (tertiary tier).
  • 88. Data Dec 88 Figure 3: Integrated Continuum of Positive Behavior Support With Intervention Examples SOURCE: Sugai, G. (2007, December). Responsiveness-to-intervention: Lessons learned and to be learned. Keynote presentation at and paper for the RTI Summit, U.S. Department of Education, Washington, D.C. Reprinted with permission. Although applications of the RTI logic and SWPBS approach seem straightforward, research (Christ et al., 2005; Fairbanks, Sugai, Guardino, & Lathrop, 2007; Fuchs & Deschler, 2007; Gresham, 2005; Klingner & Edwards, 2006; Sandomierski, Kincaid, & Algozzine, 2007) has shown that school personnel need to continually rethink their practices in a number of areas. 1. How curriculum adoptions and instructional design decisions are made; 2. How special and general educators work together to address the needs of all students; 3. What assessment tools and procedures are used to make reliable and valid instructional decisions; 4. How high fidelity of implementation of best practices is assessed, evaluated, and supported; 5. What communications among students, teachers, and families look like; 6. How resources are organized to respond effectively and efficiently with students who do not achieve the desired outcomes in response to the intervention; 7. What criteria are used to determine whether a practice is evidence based; 8. How the practices and systems align with the social, cultural, and educational vision and values of students, family members, and school staff.
  • 89. Data Dec 89 In conclusion, RTI is a good framework and logic for organizing and increasing the efficiency with which evidence-based practices are selected, organized, integrated, implemented, and adapted. Examples and applications of the RTI logic are being developed, demonstrated, and tested in a number of academic content areas and in social behavior supports. As represented in SWPBS, RTI gives priority to the continuous monitoring of important student performance indicators in response to high-fidelity implementation of evidence-based practices. Timely screening and data-based decisions are encouraged so that more effective and efficient interventions can be provided for students whose behaviors are not responsive to core practices and interventions. Preventing the development and lessening the intensity of problem behavior must be a high priority of instructors seeking to maximize student learning and the impact of effective interventions. If done wisely in the context of other initiatives and interventions across classroom and nonclassroom settings, the possibility of improving student academic and social behavior outcomes can become a reality for all students. References Brown-Chidsey, R., & Steege, M. W. (2005). Response to intervention: Principles and strategies for effective practice. New York: Guildford Press. Christ, T. J., Burns, M. K., & Ysseldyke, J. E. (2005). Conceptual confusion within response-to-intervention vernacular: Clarifying meaningful differences. Communique, 34(3), 1–8. Fairbanks, S., Sugai, G., Guardino, D., & Lathrop, M. (2007). Response to intervention: Examining classroom behavior support in second grade. Exceptional Children, 73, 288–310. Fuchs, D., & Deschler, D. D. (2007). What we need to know about responsiveness to intervention (and shouldn’t be afraid to ask). Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 22, 129–136. Fuchs, D., & Fuchs, L. S. (Eds.). (2007). Responsiveness to intervention [Special issue]. Teaching Exceptional Children, 39(5). Fuchs, D., Mock, D., Morgan, P. L., & Young, C. L. (2003). Responsiveness-to- intervention: Definitions, evidence, and implications for the learning disabilities construct. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 18(3), 157– 171. Gresham, R. M. (2005). Response to intervention: An alternative means of identifying students as emotionally disturbed. Education and Treatment of Children, 28, 328–344. Gresham, F. M., Reschly, D. J., Tilly, W. D., Fletcher, J., Burns, M., Prasse, D., et al. (2005). A response to intervention perspective. The School Psychologist, 59(1), 26–33. Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004, Pub. L. No. 108-446, § 1400 et seq.
  • 90. Data Dec 90 Kame’enui, E. J. (2007). A new paradigm: Responsiveness to intervention. Teaching Exceptional Children, 39(5), 6–7. Klingner, J. K., & Edwards, P. A. (2006). Cultural considerations with response to intervention models. Reading Research Quarterly, 41, 108–117. Lane, K. L., Rogers, L. A., Parks, R. J., Weisenbach, J. L., Mau, A. C., Merwin, M. T., & Bergman, W. A. (2007). Function-based interventions for students who are nonresponsive to primary and secondary prevention efforts: Illustrations at the elementary and middle school levels. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 3, 169–184. National Association of State Directors of Special Education. (2006, May). Myths about response to intervention (RtI) implementation. Retrieved May 2007, from http://www.nasdse.org/Portals/0/Documents/Download%20Publications/Myt hs%20about%20RtI.pdf. O’Shaughnessy, T. E., Lane, K. L., Gresham, F. M., & Beebe-Frankenberger, M. E. (2003). Children placed at risk for learning and behavioral difficulties: Implementing a school-wide system of early identification and intervention. Remedial and Special Education, 24(1), 27–35. Sadler, C., & Sugai, G. (in press). Effective behavior and instructional support: A district model for early identification and prevention of reading and behavior problems. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Sandomierski, T., Kincaid, D., & Algozzine, B. (2007). Response to intervention and positive behavior support: Brothers from different mothers or sisters with different misters? Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports Newsletter, 4(2), 1–4. Severson, H. H., Walker, H. M., Hope-Doolittle, J., Kratochwill, T. R., & Gresham, F. M. (2007). Proactive, early screening to detect behaviorally at-risk students: Issues, approaches, emerging innovations, and professional practices. Journal of School Psychology, 45, 193–223. Sugai, G. (2007, December). Responsiveness-to-intervention: Lessons learned and to be learned. Keynote presentation at and paper for the RTI Summit, U.S. Department of Education, Washington, DC. Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., Dunlap, G., Hieneman, M., Lewis, T. J., Nelson, C. M., et al. (2000). Applying positive behavior support and functional assessment in schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 131–143. The development of this article was supported in part by Grant H029D40055 from the Office of Special Education Programs, U.S. Department of Education. Opinions expressed herein are the author's and do not necessarily reflect the position of the U.S. Department of Education or the RTI Action Network, and such endorsements should not be inferred. George Sugai may be contacted at the OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports.
  • 91. Data Dec 91 Appendix L Selected References
  • 92. Data Dec 92 Selected PBS Related References Compiled by George Sugai May 9, 2010 Adelman, H. S. (1998). Reframing mental health in schools and expanding school reform. Educational Psychologist, 33 , 135-152. Alberto, P. A. (2005). Applied behavior analysis for teachers (6th Ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Merrill/Prentice-Hall. Albin, R. W., Lucyshyn, J. M., Horner, R. H., & Flannery, K. B. (1996). Contextual fit for behavioral support plans: A model for “goodness of fit.” In L. Koegel, R. Koegel, & G. Dunlap (Eds.), Positive behavioral support: including people with difficult behavior in the community (pp. 81-96). Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes. Algozzine, B., Daunic, A. P., & Smith, S. W. (2010). Preventing problem behaviors: Schoolwide nd programs and classroom practices (2 ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press. American Psychological Association. (1994). Violence and youth: Psychology’s response. Washington, D. C.: Author. Anderson, A. R., Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., & Lehr, C. A. (2004). Check & Connect: The importance of relationships for promoting engagement with school. Journal of School Psychology, 42(2), 95-113. Anderson, C. M., & Freeman, K. A. (2000). Positive behavior support: Expanding the application of applied behavior analysis. Behavior Analyst, 23(1), 85-94. Anderson, C. M., & Kincaid, D. (2005). Applying behavior analysis to school violence and discipline problems: Schoolwide positive behavior support. Behavior Analyst, 28, 49-63. Anderson, C. M., Spaulding, S. A. (2007). Using positive behavior support to design effective classrooms. Beyond Behavior, 16(2), 27-31. Barrett, S., Bradshaw, C., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (in press). Maryland state-wide PBIS initiative. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Bear, G. G. (1990). Best practices in school discipline. In A. Thomas & J. Grimes (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology-II (pp. 649-663). Washington, DC: National Association of School Psychologists. Beard-Jordan, K., & Sugai, G. (2004). First Step to Success: An early intervention for elementary children at risk for antisocial behavior. Behavioral Disorders, 29, 396-409. Benazzi, L., Horner, R. H., & Good, R. H. (2006). Effects of behavior support team composition on the technical adequacy and contextual fit of behavior support plans. Journal of Special Education 40(3), 160-170. Biglan, A. (1995). Translating what we know about the context of antisocial behavior in to a lower prevalence of such behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 28, 479-492. Blair, K.C., Umbreit, J., Dunlap, G., & Jung, G. (in press). Promoting inclusion and peer participation through assessment-based intervention. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education. Borgmeier, C., & Horner, R.H. (2006). An evaluation of the predictive validity of confidence ratings in identifying accurate functional behavioral assessment hypothesis statements. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions 8(2), 100-105. Bradshaw C., Leaf, P., et al, (in progress) Randomized control trial of secondary and tertiary interventions added to schools already using primary prevention efforts. Blonigen, B. A., Harbaugh, W., Singell, L., Horner, R. H., Irvin, L. K., & Smolkowski, K. (2008). Application of economic analysis to school-wide positive behavior support programs. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 5-19. Bohanon, H., Fenning, P., Carney, K., Minnis, M., Anderson-Harriss, S., Moroz, K., Hicks, K., Kasper, B., Culos, C., Sailor, W., & Piggott, T. (2006).School-wide application of positive behavior support in an urban high school: A case study. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8(3), 131-145. Bradley, M. R. (2001). Special issue - Positive behavior supports: Research to practice. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 3-26.
  • 93. Data Dec 93 Bradshaw, C., Leaf, P., & Debnam, K. (2007) Project Target: a presentation at the Maryland State SWPBS Conference. Brooks, A., Todd, A. W., Tofflemoyer, S., & Horner, R. H. (2003). Use of functional assessment and a self-management system to increase academic engagement and work completion. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 5, 144-152. Broussard, C. D., & Northrup, L. (1995). An approach to functional assessment and analysis of disruptive behavior in general education classrooms. School Psychology Quarterly, 10, 151-164. Burke, M. D., Hagan-Burke, S., & Sugai, G. (2003). The efficacy of function-based interventions for students with learning disabilities who exhibit escape-maintained problem behavior: Preliminary results from a single case study. Learning Disabilities Quarterly, 26, 15-25. Cameron, J., Banko, K. M., & Pierce, W. E. (2001). Pervasive negative effects of rewards on intrinsic motivation: The myth continues. The Behavior Analyst, 24(1), 1-44. Carnine, D. (1997). Bridging the research-to-practice gap. Exceptional Children, 63, 513-521. Carnine, D. (1995). Trustworthiness, useability, and accessibility of educational research. Journal of Behavioral Education, 5, 251-258. Carr, E. G., Dunlap, G., Horner, R. H., Koegel, R. L., Turnbull, A. P., & Sailor, W. (2002). Positive behavior support: Evolution of an applied science. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 4-16. Carr, E. G., Horner, R. H., Turnbull, A. P., Marquis, J. G., Magito-McLaughlin, D., McAtee, M. L., et al. (1999). Positive behavior support for people with developmental disabilities: A research synthesis. American Association on Mental Retardation Monograph Series. Washington, D. C.: American Association on Mental Retardation. Carter, D.R. & Horner, R.H. (in press). Adding functional behavioral assessment to First Step to Success: A case study. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports. (2004). School-wide positive behavior support: Implementers’ blueprint and self-assessment. Eugene, OR: University of Oregon. Chafouleas, S., Riley-Tillman, C., Sassu, K., LaFrance, M., Patwa, S., (2007) Daily behavior report cards: An investigation of the consistency of on-task data across raters and methods. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. 9(1), 30-37. Chaney, D., et al., (in progress). Randomized control trial of Check-in/ Check-out procedures. Christenson, S., & Carroll, E. B. (1999). Strengthening the family-school partnership through Check and Connect. In E. Frydenberg (Ed.), Learning to cope: Developing as a person in complex societies, (pp. 248-273) London: Oxford University Press. Christenson, S. L., & Havsy, L. H. (2004). Family-school-peer relationships: Significance for social-emotional and academic learning.In J. E. Zins, R. P. Weissberg, M. C. Wang, & H. J. Walberg (Eds.), Building academic success on social and emotional learning: What does the research say? (pp. 59-75) New York: Teachers College Press. Christenson, S. L., Hurley, C. M., Hirsch, J. A., Kau, M., Evelo, D., & Bates, W. (1997). Check and Connect: The role of monitors in supporting high-risk youth. Reaching Today’s Youth: The Community Circle of Caring Journal, 2(1), 18-21. Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., Lehr, C. A., & Hurley, C. M. (2000). Promoting successful school completion. In D. Minke & G. Bear (Eds.), Preventing school problems— Promoting school success: Strategies and programs that work. Bethesda, MD: National Association of School Psychologists. Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., Thurlow, M. L., & Evelo, D. (1999). Promoting student engagement with school using the Check & Connect model.Australian Journal of Guidance & Counselling, 9(1), 169-184. Christenson, S. L., & Thurlow, M. L. (2004). School dropouts: Prevention considerations, interventions, and challenges. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 13(1), 36-39.
  • 94. Data Dec 94 Cohen, R., Kincaid, D., & Childs, K. (in press). Measuring school-wide positive behavior support implementation: Development and validation of the “Benchmarks of Quality.” Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Colvin, G., & Fernandez, E., (2000). Sustaining effective behavior support systems in an elementary School. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4), 251-253. Colvin, G., Kameenui, E. J., & Sugai, G. (1993). School-wide and classroom management: Reconceptualizing the integration and management of students with behavior problems in general education. Education and Treatment of Children, 16, 361-381. Colvin, G., & Lazar, M. (1997). The effective elementary classroom: Managing for success. Longmont, CO: Sopris West. Colvin, G., Sugai, G., Good, R., & Lee, Y. (1997). Effect of active supervision and precorrection on transition behaviors of elementary students. School Psychology Quarterly,12, 344- 363. Colvin, G., Sugai, G., & Kam’eenui, E. (1994). Curriculum for establishing a proactive school-wide discipline plan: Project PREPARE. Eugene, OR: Behavioral Research and Teaching, College of Education, University of Oregon. Colvin, G., Sugai, G., & Patching, W. (1993). Pre-correction: An instructional strategy for managing predictable behavior problems. Intervention in School and Clinic, 28, 143-150. Comer, J. P. (2004). Leave no child behind: Preparing today’s youth for tomorrow’s world. Yale University Press. nd Cooper, J. O., Heron, T. E., & Heward, W. L. (2007). Applied behavior analysis (2 ed.). Pearson. Upper Saddle River, NY. Cotton, K. (1995). Effective schooling practices: A research synthesis, 1995 update. Northwest Educational Laboratories. Portland, Oregon. Cregor, M. (Fall 2008). The building blocks of positive behavior. Teaching Tolerance, Issue 34, 18-21. Crone, D., Hawken, L., & Bergstrom, M., (2007). A demonstration of training, implementing and using functional behavioral assessment in 10 elementary and middle school settings. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 9(1). 15-29. Crone, D. A., & Horner, R. H. (2003). Building positive behavior support systems in schools: Functional behavioral assessment. New York: Guildford Press. Crone, D. A., Horner, R. H., & Hawken, L. S. (2004). Responding to problem behavior in schools: The behavior education program. New York: Guilford Press. Darch, C. B., & Kameenui, E. J. (2003). Instructional classroom management: A proactive nd approach to behavior management. (2 ed.). White Plains, NY: Longman. De Pry, R. L., & Sugai, G. (2002). The effect of active supervision and precorrection on minor behavioral incidents in a sixth grade general education classroom. Journal of Behavioral Education, 11, 255-267. Dootlitte, J., & Horner R., (2007). Sustaining school-wide positive behavior support. Manuscript in preparation. Drasgow, E., Yell, M. L., Bradley, R., & Shriner, J. G. (1999). The IDEA amendments of 1997: A school-wide model for conducting functional behavioral assessments and developing behavior intervention plans. Education and Treatment of Children, 22, 244-266. Drasgow, E., & Yell, M. L. (2002). School-wide behavior support: Legal implications and requirements. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 129-145. Duchnowski, A. J., Kutash, K., & Romney, S., (2006). Voices from the field: A blueprint for schools to increase involvement of families who have children with emotional disturbances. Tampa, FL: University of South Florida, The Louis de la Parte Florida Mental Health Institute, Department of Child and Family Studies. Duda, M. A., Dunlap, G., Fox, L., Lentini, R., & Clarke, S. (2004). An experimental evaluation of positive behavior support in a community preschool program. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 24(3), 143-155. Eber, L. (1996). Restructuring schools through wraparound planning: The LADSE experience. In R. J. Illback & C. M. Nelson (Eds.), School-based services for students with emotional and behavioral disorders (pp. 139-154). Binghamton, NY: Haworth Press.
  • 95. Data Dec 95 Eber, L., & Nelson, C. M. (1997). School-based wraparound planning: Integrating services for students with emotional and behavioral needs. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 67, 385-395. Epstein, M. H., Kutash, K., & Duchnowski, A. (Eds.) (1998). Outcomes for children and youth with emotional and behavioral disorders and their families: Programs and evaluation best practices. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed. Epstein, M. H., & Walker, H. M. (2002). Special education: Best practices and First Step to Success. In B. J. Burns & K. Hoagwood (Eds.), Community treatment for youth: Evidence-based interventions for severe emotional and behavioral disorders (pp. 179- 197). New York: Oxford University Press. Evans, S. W., Weist, M. D., & Serpell, Z. N. (Eds.), Advances in school-based mental health interventions: Best practices and program models. Kingston, NJ: Civic Research Institute. Fairbanks, S., Sugai, G., Guardino, D., & Lathrop, M. (2007). Response to intervention: Examining classroom behavior support in second grade. Exceptional Children, 73, 288- 310. Fanning, P., Theodos, J., Benner, C., & Bohanon-Edmonson, H. (2004). Integrating proactive discipline practices into codes of conduct. Journal of School Violence, 3(1), 45-61. Filter, K. J., McKenna, M. K., Benedict, E. A., Horner, R. H., Todd, A. W., & Watson, J. (2007). Check in/ Check out: A post-hoc evaluation of an efficient, secondary-level targeted intervention for reducing problem behaviors in schools. Education and Treatment of Children, 30, 69-84. Fixsen, D. L., Naoom, S. F., Blase, K. A., Friedman, R. M., & Wallace, F. (2005). Implementation Research: A Synthesis of the Literature. (FMHI Publication #231). Tampa, FL: Florida Mental Health Institute, The National Implementation Research Network. Fox, L., Dunlap, G., & Benito, N. (2001). Vincent’s story: From Head Start to fourth grade. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 5-6. Fox, L., Dunlap, G., & Powell, D. (2002). Young children with challenging behavior: Issues and considerations for behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 4, 208- 217. Frankland, H. C., Edmonson, H., & Turnbull, A. P. (2001). Positive behavioral support: Family, school, and community partnerships. Beyond Behavior, 11(1). 7-9. Franze, K., Kamps, D. (2008). The utilization and effects of positive behavior supports strategies on an urban school playground. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10(3),150- 161. Galloway, R., Panyon, M., Smith, C., & Wessendorf, S., (in press). Systems change with school- wide positive behavior support: Iowa’s work in progress.Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. George, H. P., & Kincaid, D. K. (2008). Building district-level capacity for positive behavior support. Journal of Behavior Interventions, 10, 20-32. Golly, A., Sprague, J., Walker, H. M., Beard, K., & Gorham, G. (2000). The First Step to Success program: An analysis of outcomes with identical twins across multiple baselines. Behavioral Disorders, 25(3), 170-182. Golly, A., Stiller, B., & Walker, H. M. (1998). First Step to Success: Replication and social validation of an early intervention program. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders 6(4), 243-250. Gottfredson, D.C. (1997). School-based crime prevention. In L. Sherman, D. Gottfredson, D. Mackenzie, J. Eck, P. Reuter, & S. Bushway (Eds.), Preventing crime: What works, what doesn't, what's promising. (Chapter 5, pp. 1-47) College Park, MD: Department of Criminology and Criminal Justice. Gottfredson, D.C. (1987). An evaluation of an organization development approach to reducing school disorder. Evaluation Review, 11, 739-763. Gottfredson, G. D., & Gottfredson, D. C. (1996). A national study of delinquency prevention in schools: Rationale for a study to describe the extensiveness and implementation of programs to prevent adolescent problem behavior in schools. Ellicott City, MD: Gottfredson Associates, Inc.
  • 96. Data Dec 96 Gottfredson, D.C., Gottfredson, G.D., & Hybl, L.G, (1993). Managing adolescent behavior: A multiyear, multischool study. American Educational Research Journal, 30, 179-215. Gottfredson, D.C., Gottfredson, G.D., & Skroban, S. (1996). A multimodel school based prevention demonstration. Journal of Adolescent Research, 11, 97-115. Gottfredson, D.C., Karweit, N.L., & Gottfredson, G.D. (1989). Reducing Disorderly Behavior in Middle Schools. (Report No. 47). Baltimore, MD: John Hopkins University, Center of Research on Elementary and Middle Schools. Greenberg, M. T., Weissberg, R. P., O’Brien, M. U., Zins, J. E., Fredericks, L., Resnik, H., & Elias, M. J. (2003). Enhancing school-based prevention and youth development through coordinated social, emotional, and academic learning. American Psychologist, 58, 466- 474. Greenwood, C. R., Delquadri, J., & Bulgren, J. (1993). Current challenges to behavioral technology in the reform of schooling: Large-scale, high-quality implementation and sustained use of effective educational practices. Education and Treatment of Children, 16(4), 401-404. Gresham, F. M., Van, M. B., & Cook, C. R. (2006). Social skills training for teaching replacement behaviors: Remediating acquisition deficits in at-risk students. Behavioral Disorders, 31, 363-377. Gresham, F. M., Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2001). Social competence of students with high- incidence disabilities: Conceptual and methodological issues in interpreting outcomes of social skills training. Exceptional Children, 67, 311-344. Guerra, N. G., & Williams, K. R. (1996). A program planning guide for youth violence prevention: A risk-focused approach. Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence. University of Colorado, Boulder. Harvey, M. T., Lewis-Palmer, T., Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2003). Trans-situational interventions: Generalization of behavior support across school and home environments. Behavioral Disorders, 28,299-213. Hawken, L. (2006). School psychologists as leaders in the implementation of a targeted intervention: The Behavior Education Program (BEP). School Psychology Quarterly, 21, 91-111. Hawken, L. S. & Johnston, S. (in press). Preventing severe problem behavior in young children: The Behavior Education Program. Journal of Early and Intensive Behavior Intervention. Hawken, L. & Horner, R. (2003). Evaluation of a targeted group intervention within a school-wide system of behavior support, Journal of Behavioral Education, 12, 225-240. Hawken, L. S. & MacLeod, K. S., & O’Neill, R. (2007). Effects of function of problem behavior on the responsiveness to the Behavior Education Program. Manuscript submitted for publication. Hawken, L. S., MacLeod, K. S., & Rawlings, L. (2007). Effects of the Behavior Education Program on office discipline referrals of elementary school students. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 9, 94-101. Heck, A. Collins, J., Peterson, L. (2001). Decreasing children’s risk taking on the playground. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 34, 349-352. Hirsch, E. J., Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Schnacker, L. (2004). Using school bus discipline referral data in decision making: Two case studies. Preventing School Failure, 48(4), 4-9. Hoagwood, K. E., Olin, S. S., Kerker, B. D., Kratochwill, T. R., Crowe, M., & Saka, N. (2007). Empirically based school interventions targeted at academic and mental health functioning. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 15, 66-92. Holburn, S., & Vietze, P. M. (2002) (Eds.). Person-centered planning: Research, practice, & future directions. Paul H. Brookes: Baltimore, MD. Horner, R. H. (1994). Functional assessment: Contributions and future directions. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 27, 401-404. Horner, R. H., Carr, E. G., Halle, J., McGee, G., Odom, S., & Wolery, M. (2005). The use of single-subject research to identify evidence-based practice in special education. Exceptional Children, 71,165-180. Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., Todd, A. W., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (2005). School-wide positive behavior support. In L. Bambara & L. Kern (Eds.), Individualized supports for students with
  • 97. Data Dec 97 problem behaviors: Designing positive behavior support plans (pp. 359-390). New York: Guilford Press. Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2000). School-wide behavior support: An emerging initiative (special issue). Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 2, 231-233. Horner, R. H., & Sugai, G. (2001). “Data” need not be a four-letter word: Using data to improve schoolwide discipline. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 20-22. Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Horner, H. F. (2000). A school-wide approach to student discipline. The School Administrator, 57(2), 20-24. Horner, R., Sugai, G., Smolkowski, K., Eber, L., Nakasato, J., Todd, A., & Esperanza, J., (in press). A randomized, wait-list controlled effectiveness trial assessing school-wide positive behavior support in elementary schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Horner, R. H., Sugai, G. Todd, A. W., & Lewis-Palmer, T. (1999-2000). Elements of behavior support plans: A technical brief. Exceptionality, 8, 205-216. Horner, R. H., Todd, A. W., Lewis-Palmer, T., Irvin, L. K., Sugai, G., & Boland, J. B. (2004). The school-Wide Evaluation Tool (SET): A research instrument for assessing school-wide positive behavior support, Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 3-12. Hyman, I., Flanagan, D., & Smith, K. (1982). Discipline in the schools. In C. R. Reynolds & T. B. Gutkin (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology. (pp. 454-480). New York: Wiley. Ingram, K., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Sugai, G. (2005). Function-based intervention planning: Comparing the effectiveness of FBA indicated and contra-indicated intervention plans. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 7, 224-236. Irvin, L. K., Horner, R. H., Ingram, K., Todd, A. W., Sugai, G., Sampson, N. K., & Boland, J. B. (2006). Using office discipline referral data for decision making about student behavior in elementary and middle schools: An empirical evaluation of validity. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8, 10-23. Irvin, L.K., Tobin, T.J., Sprague, J.R., Sugai, G., & Vincent, C.G. (2004). Validity of office discipline referral measures as indices of school-wide behavioral status and effects of school-wide behavioral interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 131- 147. Irwin D., & Algozzine, R., (2005) North Carolina positive behavior supports evaluation report. Unpublished evaluation report. Johnson, J. G., Cohen, P., Smailes, E. M., Kasen, S., & Brook. J. S. (2002). Television viewing and aggressive behavior during adolescence and adulthood. Science, 295, 2468-2471. Jones, C., Caravaca, L., Cizek, S., Horner, R. H., & Vincent, C. G. (2006). Culturally responsive schoolwide positive behavior support: A case study in one school with a high proportion of Native American Students. Multiple Voices, 9(1),108-119. Jones, V. F. & Jones, L. S. (2001). Comprehensive classroom management: Creating th communities of support and solving problems (6 ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon. Kame’enui, E. J. (2007). A new paradigm: Responsiveness to intervention. Teaching Exceptional Children, 39(5), 6-7. Kameenui, E. J., & Carnine, D. W. (2002). Effective teaching strategies that accommodate nd diverse learners (2 ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill. Kamps, D., Kravits, T., Stolze, J., & Swaggart, B. (1990). Prevention strategies for at-risk students and students with EBD in urban elementary schools. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 7, 178-188. Kauffman, A., Todd, A., Meyer, G., & Horner, R., (in press). The effects of a targeted intervention to reduce problem behavior: Elementary School Implementation of Check-in/ Check-out. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Kauffman, J. (2005). Characteristics of emotional and behavior disorders of children and youth (8th ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill. Kazdin, A. E. (1982). Applying behavioral principles in the schools. In C. R. Reynolds & T. B. Gutkin (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology (pp. 501-529). New York: Wiley. Kellam, S. G., Ling. X., Merisca, R., Brown, C. H., & Ialong, N. (1998). The effect of the level of aggression in the first grade classroom on the course and malleability of aggressive behavior into middle school. Development and Psychopathology, 10, 165-185.
  • 98. Data Dec 98 Kern, L., Gallagher, P., Starosta, K., Hickman, W., & George, M. (2006). Longitudinal outcomes of functional behavioral assessment-based interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8, 67-78. Kerr, M. M., & Nelson, C. M. (1998). Strategies for managing problem behaviors in the classroom (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill. Kincaid, D. (1996). Person-centered planning. In L. Koegel, R. Koegel, & G. Dunlap (Eds.), Positive behavioral support: Including people with difficult behavior in the community (pp. 439-465). Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes. Kincaid, D., Childs, K., Blasé, K. A., & Wallace, F. (2007). Identifying barriers and facilitators in implementing schoolwide positive behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 9, 174-184. Kincaid, D., & Fox, L. (2002). Person-centered planning and positive behavior support. In S. Holburn & P. M. Vietze (Eds.), Person-centered planning: Research, practice, & future directions (pp. 29-50). Paul H. Brookes: Baltimore, MD. Knitzer, J. (1993). Children’s mental health policy: Challenging the future. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 1(1), 8-16. Knitzer, J., Steinberg, Z., & Fleisch, B. (1990). At the schoolhouse door: An examination of programs and policies for children with behavioral and emotional problems. New York: Bank Street College of Education. Knoff, H. M. (1985). Best practices in dealing with discipline referrals. In A. Thomas & J. Grimes (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology (pp. 251-262). Washington, DC: National Association of School Psychologists. Koegel, L., K., Koegel, R. L., & Dunlap, G. (Eds.) (1996). Positive behavioral support: Including people with difficult behavior in the community. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brookes. Kutash, K., & Duchnowski, A. J. (1997). Create comprehensive and collaborative systems. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 5, 66-75. Kutash, K., Duchnowski, A. J., & Lynn, N. (2006). School-based mental health: An empirical guide for decision-makers. Tampa, FL: University of South Florida. The Louis de la Parte Florida mental Health Institute. Department of Child and Family Studies. Research and Training Center for Mental Health. Lane, K. L., Wehby, J., Menzies, H. M., Doukas, G. L., Munton, S. M., & Gregg, R. M. (2003). Social skills instruction for students at risk for antisocial behavior: The effects of small- group instruction. Behavioral Disorders, 28, 229-248. Lassen, S., Steele, M., & Sailor, W. (2006). The relationship of school-wide positive behavior support to academic achievement in an urban middle school. Psychology in Schools 43(6), 701-712. Latham, G. I. (1997). Behind the schoolhouse door: Eight skills every teacher should have. Utah State University. Latham, G. (1992). Interacting with at-risk children: The positive position. Principal, 72(1), 26-30. Latham, G.I. (1988). The birth and death cycles of educational innovations. Principal, 68(1), 41- 44. Lee, Y., Sugai, G., & Horner, R. (1999). Effect of component skill instruction on math performance and on-task, problem, and off-task behavior of students with emotional and behavioral disorders. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 1, 195-204. Lehr, C. A., Hansen, A., Sinclair, M. F., & Christenson, S. L. (2003). Moving beyond dropout towards school completion: An integrative review of data-based interventions. School Psychology Review, 32(3), 342-364. Lehr, C. A., Sinclair, M. F., & Christenson, S. L. (2004). Addressing student engagement and truancy prevention during the elementary years: A replication study of the Check & Connect model. Journal of Education for Students Placed At Risk, 9(3), 279-301. Lewis, T. J. (2001). Building infrastructure to enhance schoolwide systems of positive behavioral support: Essential features of technical assistance. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 10-12. Lewis, T. J., & Daniels, C. (2000). Rethinking school discipline through effective behavioral support. Reaching Today’s Youth, 5, 43-47.
  • 99. Data Dec 99 Lewis, T. J. Garrison-Harrell, L. (1999). Effective behavior support: Designing setting specific interventions. Effective School Practices, 17, 38-46. Lewis, T. J., & Sugai, G. (1996). Functional assessment of problem behavior: A pilot investigation of the comparative and interactive effects of teacher and peer social attention on students in general education settings. School Psychology Quarterly, 11, 1-19 Lewis, T. J., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1998). Reducing problem behavior through a school-wide system of effective behavioral support: Investigation of a school-wide social skills training program and contextual interventions. School Psychology Review, 27, 446-459. Lewis, T. J., & Newcomer, L. L. (2002). Examining the efficacy of school-based consultation: Recommendations for improving outcomes. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 165- 181. Lewis, T. J., & Newcomer, L., Kelk, M., & Powers, L. (2000). Preventing and addressing aggressive and violent behavior through individual systems of positive behavioral support. Reaching Today’s Youth, 5, 37-41. Lewis, T. J., & Sugai, G. (1999). Effective behavior support: A systems approach to proactive school-wide management. Focus on Exceptional Children, 31(6), 1-24. Lewis, T. J., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1998). Reducing problem behavior through a school-wide system of effective behavioral support: Investigation of a school-wide social skills training program and contextual interventions. School Psychology Review, 27, 446-459. Lewis-Palmer, T., & Barrett, S. (2007). Establishing and sustaining statewide positive behavior support implementation: A description of Maryland’s Model. Journal of Evidence-based Practices for Schools, 8(1), 45-62. Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Larson, S. (1999). Using data to guide decisions about program implementation and effectiveness. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 47-53. Lipsey, M. W. (1991). The effect of treatment on juvenile delinquents: Results from meta-analysis. In F. Losel, D. Bender, & T. Bliesener (Eds), Psychology and law. New York: Walter de Gruyter. Lipsey, M. W. (1992). Juvenile delinquency treatment: A meta-analytic inquiry into the variability of effects. In T. D. Cook, H. Cooper, D. S. Cordray, H. Hartman, L. V. Hedges, R. V. Light, T. A. Louis, & F. Mostellar (Eds), Meta-analysis for explanation. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage. Lipsey, M. W., & Wilson, D. B. (1993). The efficacy of psychological, educational, and behavioral treatment: Confirmation from meta-analysis. American Psychologist, 48, 1181-1209. Lohrmann-O’Rourke, S., Knoster, T., Sabatine, K., Smith, D., Horvath, G., & Llewellyn, G., (2000). School-wide Application of PBS in the Bangor Area School District. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4). 238-240. Lucyshyn, J., Albin, R., Horner, R.H., Mann, J. C., Mann, J. A. & Wadsworth, G. (2007). Family implementation of positive behavior support with a child with autism: A longitudinal, single case experimental and descriptive replication and extension. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions 9(3), 131-150. Luiselli, J. K., Putnam, R. F., & Handler, M. W. (2001). Improving discipline practices in public schools: Description of a whole-school and district-wide model of behavior analysis consultation. The Behavior Analyst Today, 2(1), 18-26. Luiselli, J. K, Putnam, R. F, Handler, M. W, & Feinberg, A. B. (2005). Whole-school positive behaviour support: Effects on student discipline problems and academic performance. Educational Psychology 25(2-3), 183-198. Luiselli, J.K., Putnam, R.F., & Sunderland, M. (2002). Longitudinal evaluation of behavior support intervention in a public middle school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 182- 188. Lyst, A. M., Gabriel, S., O’Shaughnessy, T. E., Meyers, J., & Meyers, B. (2005).Social validity: Perceptions of Check and Connect with early literacy support. Journal of School Psychology, 43(3), 197-218. March, R. E., & Horner, R.H. (2002). Feasibility and contributions of functional behavioral assessment in schools. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 10, 158-170.
  • 100. Data Dec 100 Marr, M. B., Audette, B., White, R., Ellis, E., & Algozzine, B. (2002). School-wide discipline and classroom ecology. Special Services in the Schools, 18, 55-73. Martella, R. C., Nelson, J. R., & Marchand-Martella, N. E. (2003). Managing disruptive behaviors in the schools: A schoolwide, classroom, and individualized social learning approach. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Mayer, R. G. (2002). Behavioral strategies to reduce school violence. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 83-100. Mayer, R. G. (1998). Constructive discipline for school personnel. Education and Treatment of Children, 22, 36-54. Mayer, G. (1995). Preventing antisocial behavior in the schools. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 28, 467-478. Mayer, G. R., & Butterworth, T. (1979). A preventive approach to school violence and vandalism: An experimental study. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 57, 436-441. Mayer, G. R., Butterworth, T., Komoto, T., & Benoit, R. (1983). The influence of the school principal on the consultant’s effectiveness. Elementary School Guidance and Counseling, 17, 274-279. Mayer, G. R., Butterworth, T., Nafpaktitis, M., & Suzer-Azaroff, B. (1983). Preventing school vandalism and improving discipline: A three year study. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 355-369. Mayer, G. R., & Sulzer-Azaroff, B. (1990). Interventions for vandalism. In G. Stoner, M.K. Shinn, & H.M. Walker (Eds.), Interventions for achievement and behavior problems. National Association of School Psychologists Monograph. Washington, D.C. McCord, J. (Ed.) (1995). Coercion and punishment in long-term perspective. New York: Cambridge University Press. McCurdy, B. L., Kunsch, C., & Reibstein, S. (2007). Secondary prevention in the urban school: Implementing the Behavior Education Program. Preventing School Failure, 12-19. McCurdy, B. L., Mannella, M. C., & Eldridge, N. (2003). Positive behavior support in urban schools: Can we prevent the escalation of antisocial behavior. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions, 5, 158-170. McEvoy, A., & Welker, R. (2000). Antisocial behavior, academic failure, and school climate: A critical review. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 8(3), 130-141. McIntosh, K., Borgmeier, C., Anderson, C. M., Horner, R. H., Rodriguez, B. J., & Tobin, T. J. (2008). Technical adequacy of the functional assessment checklist: Teachers and staff (FACTS) FBA interview measure. Journal of Behavior Intervention, 10, 33-45. McIntosh, K. Chard, D., Boland, J., & Horner, R. (2006). A demonstration of combined efforts in school-wide academic and behavioral systems and incidence of reading and behavior challenges in early elementary grades. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. 8(3). 146-154. McIntosh, K., Flannery, K. B., Sugai, G., Braun, D., & Cochrane, K. L. (2008). Relationships between academics and problem behavior in the transition from middle school to high school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 243-255. McIntosh, K., Horner, R.H., Chard, D., Boland, J., & Good, R. (in press). The use of reading and behavior screening measures to predict non-response to school-wide positive behavior support: A longitudinal analysis. School Psychology Review. Metzler, C. W., Biglan, A., Rusby, J. C., & Sprague, J. R. (2001). Evaluation of a comprehensive behavior management program to improve school-wide positive behavior support. Education and Treatment of Children, 24, 448-479. Miller, M., Fenty, N., & Scott, T. M. (in press). An examination of the effects of social skills instruction in the context of small group reading. Preventing School Failure. Moore, D., W., Anderson, A., & Kumar, K. (2005). Instructional adaptation in the management of escape-maintained behavior in a classroom. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 7, 216-223. Moote, G., Smyth, N. J., & Wodarski, J. S. (1999).Social skills training with youth in school settings: A Review. Research on Social Work Practice, 9, 427-465. Moran, D. J. & Malott, R. W. (2004) (Eds.). Evidence-based educational methods. San Diego, CA: Elsevier Academic Press.
  • 101. Data Dec 101 Morgan, D. P., & Jenson, W. R. (1988). Teaching behaviorally disordered students: Preferred practices. Columbus, OH: Merrill. Morrison, G. M., Furlong, M. J., & Morrison, R. L. (1997). The safe school: Moving beyond crime prevention to school empowerment. In A. Goldstein & J. Cooley (Eds.), The handbook of violence prevention. New York: Guilford. Morse, A. B., Anderson, A. R., Christenson, S. L., & Lehr, C. A. (2004). Promoting school completion. Principal Leadership, 4(6), 9-13. Muscott, H. S., Mann, E., Benjamin, T. B., Gately, S., Bell, K. E., & Muscott, A. J. (2004). Positive behavioral interventions and supports in New Hampshire: Preliminary results of a statewide system for implementing schoolwide discipline practices. Education and Treatment of Children, 27, 453-475. Muscott, H. S., Mann, E. & LeBrun, M. R. (2008). Positive behavioral Interventions and supports in New Hampshire, Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10(3), 190-205. Nakasato, J. (2000). Data-based decision making in Hawaii’s behavior support effort. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 247-251. Nelson, J. R. (1996). Designing schools to meet the needs of students who exhibit disruptive behavior. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4, 147-161. Nelson, J. R., Colvin, G., & Smith, D. J. (1996). The effects of setting clear standards on students’ social behavior in common areas of the school. The Journal of At-Risk Issues, Summer/Fall, 10-17. Nelson, J. R., Johnson, A., & Marchand-Martella, N. (1996). Effects of direct instruction, cooperative learning, and independent learning practices on the classroom behavior of students with behavioral disorders: A comparative analysis. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4, 53-62. Nelson, J. R., Martella, R., & Galand, B. (1998). The effects of teaching school expectations and establishing a consistent consequence on formal office disciplinary actions. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 6, 153-161. Nersesian, M., Todd, A., Lehmann, J., & Watson, J., (2000). School-wide behavior support through district-level system change. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4). 244-246. Newcomer, L. L. & Lewis, T. J. (2004). Functional behavioral assessment: An investigation of assessment reliability and effectiveness of function-Based interventions. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders 12(3), 168-181. Odom, S. L., Brantlinger, E., Gersten, R., Horner, R. H., Thompson, B., & Harris, K. R. (2005). Research in special education: Scientific methods and evidence-based practices. Exceptional Children, 71, 137-148. O’Neill, R. E., Horner, R. H., Albin, R. W., Storey, K., & Sprague, J. R. (1997). Functional analysis nd of problem behavior: A practical assessment guide (2 ed.). Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole. Paine, S. C., Radicchi, J., Rosellini, L. C., Deutchman, L., & Darch, C. B. (1983). Structuring your classroom for academic success. Champaign, IL: Research Press. Patterson, G. R., Reid, J. B., & Dishion, T. J. (1992). Antisocial boys. Eugene, OR: Castalia Press. Peters, M. T., & Heron, T. E. (1993). When the best is not good enough: An examination of best practice. Journal of Special Education, 26, 371-385. Powers, L. J. (2003). Examining the effects of targeted group social skills intervention in schools with and without school-wide systems of positive behavior support. Unpublished doctoral dissertation. Columbia, MO: University of Missouri. Preciado, J., Horner, R.H., & Baker, S. (2009). Using a function-based approach to decrease problem behavior and increase academic engagement for Latino English Language Learners. Journal of Special Education, 42, 227-240. Pruitt, R., Kelsh, B., & Sugai, G. M. (1989). Pro-tickets: A positive school-wide behavior management program. In 1989 Oregon Conference Monograph. Eugene, OR: University of Oregon.
  • 102. Data Dec 102 Putnam, R. F., Handler, M. W., Ramirez-Platt, C. M., & Luiselli, J. K. (2003). Improving student bus-riding behavior through a whole-school intervention. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 36, 583-589. Putnam, R.F., Luiselli, J.K., Handler, M.W., & Jefferson, G.L. (in press). Evaluating student discipline practices in a public school through behavioral assessment of office referrals. Behavior Modification. Putnam, R. F., Luiselli, J. K., & Jefferson, G. L. (2002). Expanding technical assistance consultation to public schools: District-wide evaluation of instructional and behavior support practices for students with developmental disabilities. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24,113-128. Putnam, R.F., Luiselli, J.K., Sennett, K., & Malonson, J. (2002). Cost-efficacy analysis of out-of- district special education placements: An evaluative measure of behavior support intervention in public schools. Journal of Special Education Leadership, 15, 17-24. Putnam, R. F., Luiselli, J. K. & Sunderland, M. (2002). Longitudinal evaluation of behavior support intervention in a public middle school. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 182- 188. Raffaele Mendez, L. M., Knoff, H. M., & Ferron, J. M. (2002). School demographic variables and out-of-school suspension rates: A quantitative and qualitative analysis of a large, ethnically diverse school district. Psychology in the Schools, 39, 259-277. Reschly, A., & Christenson, S. L. (2006). School completion. In G. G. Bear & K. M. Minke (Eds.), Children’s needs III: Development, prevention, and intervention (pp. 103-112). Bethesda, MD: National Association of School Psychologists. Reiss, S. (2005), Extrinsic and intrinsic motivation at 30: Unresolved scientific issues. Behavior Analysis, 28,1-14. Rutherford, R. B., Jr., Quinn, M. M., & Mathur, S. R. (2004) (Eds.). Handbook of research in emotional and behavioral disorders. New York: Guildford Press. Rutter, M., & Maughan, B. (2002). School effectiveness findings 1979-2002. Journal of School Psychology, 40, 451-475. Ryan, J. B., Sanders, S., Katsiyannis, A., & Yell, M. L. (2007). Using timeout effectively in the classroom. Teaching Exceptional Children, 4(4), 60-67. Sadler, C., (2000). Effective Behavior support implementation at the district level: Tigard-Tualatin School District. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2(4), 241-243. Sadler, C., & Sugai, G. (2009). Effective behavior and instructional support: A district model for early identification and prevention of reading and behavior problems. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 11, 35-46. Safran, S. P. (2006). Using the effective behavior supports survey to guide development of schoolwide positive behavior support. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8, 3-9. Safran, S. P. & Oswald, K. (2003). Positive behavior supports: Can schools reshape disciplinary practices? Exceptional Children, 69, 361-373. Sailor, W. (1996). New structures and systems change for comprehensive positive behavioral support. In L., Koegel, R. Koegel, & G. Dunlap (Eds.), Positive behavioral support: Including people with difficult behavior in the community (pp. 163-206). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. Schneider, T., Walker, H., & Sprague, J. (2000). Safe school design: A handbook for educational leaders. ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Management. University Oregon, Eugene. Scott, T. M., & Barrett, S. B. (2004). Using staff and student time engaged in disciplinary procedures to evaluate the impact of school-wide PBS. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 21-28. Scott, T. M., & Caron, D. (2006). Functional behavior assessment at the school-wide level: Determining predictability and function of typical problem behaviors. Preventing School Failure50(1), 13-20. Scott, T. M., & Eber, L. (2003). Functional assessment and wraparound as systemic school processes: Primary, secondary, and tertiary systems examples. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 5, 131-143.
  • 103. Data Dec 103 Scott, T. M., & Hunter, J. (2001). Initiative schoolwide support systems: An administrator’s guide to the process. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 13-15. Scott, T. M., Liaupsin, C. J., Nelson, C. M., & Jolivette, K. (2003). Ensuring student success through team-based functional behavioral assessment. Teaching Exceptional Children, 35(5), 16-21. Scott, T. M., Liaupsin, C., & Nelson, C. M., & McIntyre, J. (2005). Team-based functional rehavior assessment as a proactive public school process: A descriptive analysis of current barriers. Journal of Behavioral Education 14(1), 57-71. Scott, T. M., McIntyre, J., Liaupsin, C., Nelson, C. M., Conroy, M., & Payne, L. (2005). An examination of the relation between functional behavior assessment and selected intervention strategies with school-based teams. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 7(4), 205-215. Scott, T. M., & Nelson, C. M. (1999). Using functional behavioral assessment to develop effective intervention plans: Practical classroom applications. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 1, 242-251. Simeonsson, R.J. (1994). Risk, resilience, and prevention: Promoting the well-being of all children. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes Publishing Co. Simonsen, B., Fairbanks, S., Briesch, A., Myers, D., & Sugai, G. (2008). Evidence-based practices in classroom management: Considerations for research to practice. Education and Treatment of Children, 31, 351-380. Sinclair, M. F., Christenson, S. L., Evelo, D. L., & Hurley, C. M. (1998). Dropout prevention for youth with disabilities: Efficacy of a sustained school engagement procedure. Exceptional Children, 65(1), 7-21. Sinclair, M., Hurley, C., Christenson, S., Thurlow, M., & Evelo, D. (2002). Connections that keep kids coming to school. In R. Algozzine & P. Kay (Eds.), Preventing problem behaviors: A handbook of successful prevention strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press. Sinclair, M. F., Christenson, S. L., & Thurlow, M. L. (2005). Promoting school completion of urban secondary youth with emotional or behavioral disabilities. Exceptional Children, 71, 465- 482. Sinclair, M. F., Lam, S. F., Christenson, S. L. & Evelo, D. (1994). Parent-teacher action research in profile. Equity and Choice, 10(1), 21-35. Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (1999). The dark side of zero tolerance: Can punishment lead to safe schools? Phi Delta Kappan, 80, 372-382. Skiba, R. J., & Peterson, R. L. (2000). School discipline at a crossroads: From zero tolerance to early response. Exceptional Children, 66, 335-347. Skiba, R. J., Peterson, R. L., & Williams, T. (1997). Office referrals and suspensions: Disciplinary intervention in middle schools. Education and Treatment of Children, 20, 295-315. Skiba, R., Rausch, M. K., & Ritter, S. (2004). Children left behind: Series summary and recommendations. Education Policy Briefs, 2(4), 1-4. (also see issues 1-3). Sprague, J., & Biglan, A., et al (in progress). A randomized control trial of school-wide positive behavior support with middle schools. Sprague, J., Nishioka, V., & Smith, S., (2007). Safe schools, positive behavior supports, and mental health supports: Lessons learned from three safe schools/healthy students communities. Journal of School Violence. 6(2) 93-115. Sprague, J., Sugai, G., & Walker, H. (I1999). Antisocial behavior in schools. In S. Watson & F. Gresham (Eds.), Child behavior therapy: Ecological considerations in assessment, treatment, and evaluation. New York, NY: Plenum Press. Sprague, J., Walker, H., Golly, A., White, K., Myers, D. R., & Shannon, T. (2001). Translating research into effective practice: The effects of a universal staff and student intervention on indicators of discipline and school safety. Education and Treatment of Children, 24, 495-511. Sprick, R., Booher, M., & Garrison, M. (2009). Behavioral response to intervention: Creating a continuum of problem-solving & support. Eugene, OR: Pacific Northwest Publishing. Sprick, R., Sprick, M., & Garrison, M. (1992). Foundations: Developing positive school-wide discipline policies. Longmont, CO: Sopris West.
  • 104. Data Dec 104 Stover, A. C., Dunlap, G., & Neff, B. (in press). The effects of a contingency contracting program on the nocturnal enuresis of three children. Research on Social Work Practice. Stormont, M., Lewis, T. J., & Beckner, R. (2005). Positive behavior support systems: Applying key features in preschools settings. Teaching Exceptional Children, 37(2), 42-49. Strain, P. S., & Joseph, G. E. (2004). A not so good job with “Good Job”: A response to Kohn 2001. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 55-59. Sugai, G. (1996). Providing effective behavior support to all students: Procedures and processes. SAIL, 11(1), 1-4. Sugai, G. M. (1992). The design of instruction and the proactive management of social behaviors. Learning Disabilities Forum, 17(2), 20-23. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2005). Educational applications (Volume III). In M. Hersen. Encyclopedia of behavior modification and cognitive behavior therapy. Sage Publications: New York. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2002). The evolution of discipline practices: School-wide positive behavior supports. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 24, 23-50. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (2001). Features of effective behavior support at the district level. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 16-19. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (1999). Discipline and behavioral support: Preferred processes and practices. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 10-22. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. (1994). Including students with severe behavior problems in general education settings: Assumptions, challenges, and solutions. In J. Marr, G. Sugai, & G. Tindal (Eds.). The Oregon conference monograph, 6, 102-20. Eugene, OR: University of Oregon. Sugai, G., & Horner, R. H. (1999-2000). Including the functional behavioral assessment technology in schools (invited special issue). Exceptionality, 8, 145-148. Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., Dunlap, G. Hieneman, M., Lewis, T. J., Nelson, C. M., Scott, T., Liaupsin, C., Sailor, W., Turnbull, A. P., Turnbull, H. R., III, Wickham, D., Wilcox, B., & Ruef, M. (2000). Applying positive behavioral support and functional behavioral assessment in schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 131-143. Sugai, G., Lewis-Palmer, T., & Hagan-Burke, S. (1999-2000). Overview of the functional behavioral assessment process. Exceptionality, 8, 149-160. Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., & Gresham, F. (2002). Behaviorally effective school environments. In M. R. Shinn, G. Stoner, & H. M. Walker (Eds), Interventions for academic and behavior problems: Preventive and remedial approaches (pp. 315-350). National Association of School Psychologists. Silver Spring, MD. Sugai, G., Horner, R., & Todd, A. (1996). Effective behavior support systems survey. Behavioral Research and Teaching, University of Oregon. Eugene, Oregon. Sugai, G., & Lewis, T. (1996). Preferred and promising practices for social skills instruction. Focus on Exceptional Children, 29(4), 1-16. Sugai, G., & Pruitt, R. (1993). Phases, steps, and guidelines for building school-wide behavior management programs: A practitioner's handbook. Behavior Disorders Handbook No. 1. Behavior Disorders Program. University of Oregon. Eugene. Sugai, G., Simonsen, B., & Horner, R. H. (2008) (Eds.). Schoolwide positive behavior supports: A continuum of positive behavior supports for all students (invited special issue). Teaching Exceptional Children, 40(6). 5. Sugai, G., & Tindal, G. (1993). Effective school consultation: An interactive approach. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole. Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1994). Achieving educational excellence: Behavior analysis for achieving classroom and schoolwide behavior change. San Marcos, CA: Western Image. Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1986). Achieving educational excellence: Using behavioral strategies. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston. Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G. R. (1994). Achieving educational excellence: Behavior analysis for achieving classroom and schoolwide behavior change. San Marcos, CA: Western Image.
  • 105. Data Dec 105 Taylor-Greene, S., Brown, D., Nelson, L., Longton, J., Gassman, Cohen, J., Swartz, J., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Hall, S. (1997). School-wide behavioral support: Starting the year off right. Journal of Behavioral Education, 7, 99-112. Taylor-Greene, S. J., & Kartub, D. T. (2000). Durable implementation of school-wide behavior support: The high five program. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 2, 233-245. Thurlow, M. L., Christenson, S. L., Sinclair, M. F., & Evelo, D. L. (1997). Wanting the unwanted: Keeping those "out of here" kids in school.Beyond Behavior, 8(3), 10-16. Tobin, T., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1996). Patterns in middle school discipline records. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4(2), 82-94. Todd, A. W., Campbell, A. L., Meyer, G. W., & Horner, R. H. (2008). The effects of a targeted intervention to reduct problem behaviors: Elementary school implementation of check in- check out. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 46-55. Todd, A., Horner, R., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1999). Individualizing school-wide discipline for students with chronic problem behaviors: A team approach. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 72-82. Todd, A. W., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Sprague, J. R. (1999). Effective behavior support: Strengthening school-wide systems through a team-based approach. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 23-27. Todd, A., Horner, R., Vanater, S., & Schneider, C. (1995). Working together to make change: An example of positive behavior support for a student with traumatic brain injury. Education and Treatment of Children, 20, 23-33. Todd, A. W., Kauffman, A., Meyer, G., & Horner, R.H. (in press). The effects of a targeted intervention to reduce problem behaviors: Elementary school implementation of check-in- check-out. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Tolan, P., & Guerra, N. (1994). What works in reducing adolescent violence: An empirical review of the field. Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence. University of Colorado, Boulder. Turnbull, A., Edmonson, H., Griggs, P., Wickham, D., Freeman, R., Guess, D., Lassen, S., McCart, A., Park. J., Riffel, L., Turnbull, R. & Warren. J. (2002). A blueprint for schoolwide positive behavior support: Implementation of three components. Exceptional Children, 68, 377-402. Turnbull, H.R., & Turnbull, A.P., (with Stowe, M., & Wilcox, B.L.) (2000). Free appropriate public education: The law and children with disabilities (6th ed.). Denver: Love Publishing Co. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (2001). Youth violence: A report of the surgeon general. Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Injury Prevention and Control; Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, Center for Mental Health Services; and National Institutes of Health, national Institute of Mental Health. Utley, C. A., & Sailor, W. (2002). Positive behavior support and urban school improvement: A special section of the Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 4, 195. VanDenBerg, J. E., & Grealish, E. M. (1996). Individualized services and supports through wraparound process: Philosophy and procedures. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 5, 7-21. Vaughn, B., White, R., Dunlap, G., & Strobeck, S. (in press). A case study of a classroom intervention for problem behaviors: Collateral effects and social validation. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions. Wagner, M., Sumi, C., et al., (under consideration). Effectiveness study of school-wide positive behavior support. Walker, H. M. (1998). First Steps to prevent antisocial behavior. Teaching Exceptional Children, 30(4), 16-19. Walker, H. M., Block-Pedego, A., Todis, B., & Severson, H. (1991). School archival records search (SARS): User’s guide and technical manual. Longmont, CO: Sopris West. Walker, H., Colvin, G., & Ramsey, E. (1995). Antisocial behavior in public school: Strategies and best practices. Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole.
  • 106. Data Dec 106 Walker, H. M., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., Bullis, M., Sprague, J. R., Bricker, D., & Kaufman, M. J. (1996). Integrated approaches to preventing antisocial behavior patterns among school- age children and youth. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4, 194-209. Walker, H. M., Kavanagh, K., Golly, A., Stiller, B., Severson, H. H., & Feil, E. G. (1996). First steps: An early intervention program for antisocial kindergartners. College of Education, University of Oregon. Eugene, Oregon. Walker, H. M., Kavanagh, K., Stiller, B., Golly, A., Severson, H. H., & Feil, E. G. (1998). First Step to Success: An early intervention approach for preventing school antisocial behavior. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 6(2), 66-80. Walker, H. M., Ramsey, E., Gresham, R. M. (2005). Antisocial behavior in school: Evidence- based practices (2nd Ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth/Thomson Learning. Walker, H. M., & Severson, H. H. (1990). Systematic screening for behavior disorders (SSBD): User’s guide and technical manual. Longmont, CO: Sopris West. Walker, H., Stiller, B., & Golly, A. (1998). First Step to Success: A collaborative Home-School Intervention for Preventing Antisocial Behavior at the Point of School Entry. Young Exceptional Children, 1(2), 2-6. Weiss, N. R., & Knoster, T. (2008). It may be nonaversive, but is it a positive approach? Relevant questions to ask through the process of behavioral assessment and intervention. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 10, 72-78. Wolery, M. R., Bailey, D. B., Jr., & Sugai, G. M. (1988). Effective teaching: Principles and procedures of applied behavior analysis with exceptional children. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Wong, H. K., & Wong, R. T. (1991). The first days of school: How to be an effective teacher. Sunnyvale, CA: Harry K. Wong. Wright, J. A., & Dusek, J. B. (1998). Research into practice: Compiling school base rates for disruptive behaviors from student disciplinary referral data. School Psychology Review, 27, 138-147. Yell, M. L., Meadows, N. B., Drasgow, E., Shriner, J. G. (2009). Evidence-based practices for educating students with emotional and behavioral disorders. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson. Yell, M. L., Shriner, J. G., & Katsiyannis, A. (2006). Individuals with disabilities education improvement act of 2004 and IDEA regulations of 2006: Implications for educators, administrators, and teacher trainers. Focus on Exceptional Children, 39(1), 1-24. Zins, J. E., & Ponti, C. R. (1990). Best practices in school-based consultation. In A. Thomas and J. Grimes (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology - II (pp. 673-694). Washington, DC: National Association of School Psychologists.
  • 107. Data Dec 107 Appendix M Data-based Decision Making & Office Discipline Referrals
  • 108. Data Dec 108 Guidelines for Data-Based Decision Making (Sugai, Todd, Lewis-Palmer, Hagan-Burke) Data-based Action Planning Process 1. Use team 2. Identify the decisions needed 3. Identify data sources a. Office discipline referrals b. Attendance, tardies c. Suspensions, detentions, expulsions d. Academic performance e. Staff perceptions i. EBS survey ii. SET data iii. Team Implementation Checklist iv. Safe Schools Survey 4. Summarize data 5. Analyze data 6. Build action plan based on data Other Guidelines 1. Use impact of individual student behavioral incidents (repeat rule violations) on school-wide behavior incidents when deciding where to focus action planning (i.e., school-wide, nonclassroom, classroom, targeted group, targeted individual). 2. Consider location, type, time of day, etc. of behavior incidents to increase relevance, effectiveness, and efficiency of action planning process. 3. If adequate progress and/or goal achieved, consider modifications that would a. Improve effectiveness and efficiency b. Remove intervention elements that are ineffective and efficient c. Decrease amount of effort and/or resources
  • 109. Data Dec 109 General Data Decision Rules9 IF…., FOCUS ON…. >40% of students received 1+ ODR10 School-wide System >2.5 ODR/student >60% of referrals come from classroom Classroom System >50% of ODR come from <10% of classrooms >35% of referrals come from non-classroom settings Non-Classroom Systems >15% of students referred from nonclassroom settings Targeted Group >10-15 students receive >5 ODR Interventions <10 students with >10 ODR <10 students continue rate of referrals after receiving Individualized Action targeted group support Team Systems Small # students destabilizing overall functioning of school 9 Sprague, Sugai, Horner, & Walker (2000) 10 ODR = Office Discipline Referral
  • 110. Data Dec 110 General Questions for Monthly/Annual Decisions 1. How are we doing to date? Look at…. a. # referrals per day per month. i. What patterns are apparent across months? b. # referrals by student i. Are concerns individual or school-wide? c. # referrals by location. i. Where are referrals coming from? d. #/kinds of problem behaviors i. What problems are of most concern? e. # problem behaviors by time of day i. When are most problem behaviors occurring? 2. What should we do next? a. All’s well i. What can we eliminate? ii. How can we make current activities more efficient? iii. What needs to be addressed next? b. So-so i. What is and is not working? ii. What can we do to increase the efficiency, effectiveness, or relevance of what we are doing? c. Not well i. What is and is not working? ii. What can we do to improve what we are currently doing? iii. Do we need to look at other information to understand what to do next? iv. What other strategies do we need to look at?
  • 111. Data Dec 111 Establishing an Evaluation Plan (see Evaluation Worksheet) 1. Develop evaluation questions. a. What do you want to know? 2. Identify indicators for answering each question. a. What information can be collected?. 3. Develop methods and schedules for collecting and analyzing indicators. a. How and when should this information be gathered? 4. Make decisions from analysis of indicators. a. What is the answer for the question? Basic Evaluation Questions Sugai 11-26-03 What does "it" look like now? Are we satisfied with how "it" looks? What would we like "it" to look like? What would we need to do to make "it" look like that? How would we know if we've been successful? What can we do to keep "it" like that?
  • 112. Page 112 Data-based Decision Making Worksheet When do they Who needs the Data Indicators & Data Collection Evaluation Question need the information? Sources Methods & Schedule information? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
  • 113. Page 113 Practices Evaluation Decision Flowchart Start Review questions Does problem Specify features of & data on regular Yes exist? need/problem basis No Identify practice that addresses need/problem? Is practice Is evidence of Consider another research No effectiveness No practice based? available? Yes Yes Can practice No be adapted? Yes No Implement & monitor effects Is adequate progress observed? Yes Improve efficiency & sustainability of practice implementation
  • 114. Page 114 Discipline Referral Data Self-Assessment (Sugai, Simonsen, & Palmer, 1/5/99, DRAFT) Name of School_______________________________ Date_______________ To be completed by school leadership team. Rate the status of each feature of a discipline referral data management procedure. Develop an action plan for item(s) “not in place.” F = Fully in place P = Partially in place N = Not in place Status Feature F P N Clear distinctions between administrator versus staff managed rule-violations F P N Proactive comprehensive school-wide discipline system F P N Clear definitions for rule violations F P N Complete recording form (e.g., office discipline referral, behavioral incident) F P N Positively stated & defined student expectations F P N Written school-wide discipline policy F P N System for storing & maintaining data F P N Discipline leadership team F P N Team-based problem-solving format F P N Schedule for regular collection & summarization of data F P N Schedule for regular team meetings to review data F P N Person designated to manage & maintain data F P N Person designated to summarize & graph data on monthly basis F P N Standard set of evaluation questions to be considered F P N Criteria or decision rules for team to evaluate data F P N Opportunity for team to develop recommendations based on data F P N Opportunity for team to present, discuss, modify, & establish action plan with staff F P N Opportunity for staff to learn activities for implementation of action plan F P N Procedures for monitoring accuracy & consistency of implementation of action plan activities F P N Procedures for modifying action plan based on data F P N F P N F P N F P N
  • 115. Page 115 References Colvin, G., Kameenui, E. J., & Sugai, G. (1993). School-wide and classroom management: Reconceptualizing the integration and management of students with behavior problems in general education. Education and Treatment of Children, 16, 361-381. Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Todd, A. W. (2001). “Data” need not be a four-letter word: Using data to improve schoolwide discipline. Beyond Behavior, 11(1), 20-26. Horner, R.H., & Sugai, G., (2005). School-wide positive behavior support: An alternative approach to discipline in schools. In L. Bambara & L. Kern (Eds.) Individualized supports for students with problem behaviors: Designing positive behavior plans (pp. 359-390). New York: Guilford Press. Irvin, L.K., Tobin, T.J., Sprague, J.R., Sugai, G., & Vincent, C.G. (2004). Validity of office discipline referral measures as indices of school-wide behavioral status and effects of school-wide behavioral interventions. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 6, 131-147. Irvin, L. K., Horner, R. H., Ingram, K., Todd, A. W., Sugai, G., Sampson, N. K., & Boland, J. B. (2006). Using office discipline referral data for decision making about student behavior in elementary and middle schools: An empirical evaluation of validity. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions, 8,10-23. Lewis-Palmer, T., Sugai, G., & Larson, S. (1999). Using data to guide decisions about program implementation and effectiveness. Effective School Practices, 17(4), 47-53. Spaulding, S. A., Horner, R. H., Irvin, L. K., May, S. L., Emeldi, M., Tobin, T. J., & Sugai, G. (In press). School-wide social-behavioral climate, student problem behavior, and related administrative decisions: Empirical patterns from 1,510 schools nationwide. Journal of Positive Behavioral Interventions. Sprague, J. R., Sugai, G., Horner, R. H., & Walker, H. M. (1999). Using office discipline referral data to evaluate school-wide discipline and violence prevention interventions. Oregon School Studies Council Bulletin, 42(2), 1-17. Sugai, G., Sprague, J. R., Horner, R. H., & Walker, H. M. (2000). Preventing school violence: The use of office discipline referrals to assess and monitor school-wide discipline interventions. Journalof Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 8, 94-101. Taylor-Greene, S., Brown, D., Nelson, L., Longton, J., Gassman, Cohen, J., Swartz, J., Horner, R. H., Sugai, G., & Hall, S. (1997). School-wide behavioral support: Starting the year off right. Journal of Behavioral Education, 7, 99-112. Tobin, T., & Sugai, G. (1999). Predicting violence at school, chronic discipline problems, and high school outcomes from sixth graders’ school records. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 7, 40-53. Tobin, T., & Sugai, G. (1999). Discipline problems, placements, and outcomes for students with serious emotional disturbance. Behavioral Disorders, 24, 109-121. Tobin, T., Sugai, G., & Colvin, G. (1996). Patterns in middle school discipline records. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 4(2), 82-94. Wright, J. A., & Dusek, J. B. (1998). Research into practice: Compiling school base rates for disruptive behaviors from student disciplinary referral data. School Psychology Review, 27, 138-147.
  • 116. Page 116 ™ Documentation Project Referral Form Examples Version 2.0 June 16, 2003 Anne W. Todd & Rob H. Horner Intended Audience Referral form examples are for School Administrators, school teams and SWIS Facilitators to use as a guide for developing an office discipline referral form. Description The three available referral form examples are each compatible with SWIS. Each example is formatted differently, in size of paper, actual categories on the form, and the order of the information to be recorded. For more Information Go to www.swis.org
  • 117. Page 117 Example A TM SWIS OFFICE DISCIPLINE REFERRAL FORM Student(s) _________________ Referring Staff _____________ Grade Level ____ Date ______ Time ___ Location Classroom Cafeteria Bus loading zone Other __________ Playground Bathroom/restroom Parking lot Commons/common area Gym On bus Hallway/ breezeway Library Special event/assembly/ field trip Problem Behaviors (check the most intrusive) MINOR MAJOR Skip class/ truancy Vandalism Inappropriate lang. Abusive lang./ inapprop. lang Forgery/ theft Property damage Physical contact Fighting/ physical aggression Dress code Bomb threat violation Defiance/disrespect/ non-compliance Defiance/disrespect/insubordin Arson ation/non-compliant Lying/cheating Disruption Weapons Harassment/ tease/ taunt Tobacco Property misuse Other __________ Disruption Alcohol/drugs Other _______________________ Tardy Combustibles Possible Motivation Obtain peer attention Avoid tasks/activities Don’t know Obtain adult attention Avoid peer(s) Other ________________ Obtain items/ activities Avoid adult(s) Others Involved None Peers Staff Teacher Substitute Unknown Other ___________________ Administrative Decision Time in office Detention Saturday School In-school suspension Loss of privilege Parent contact Individualized instruction Out-of-school suspension Conference with student Other _______________ Comments: Follow up comments:
  • 118. Page 118 Example B Office Referral Form Name: ____________________________ Location Date: _____________ Time: ________ Playground Library Teacher: __________________________ Cafeteria Bathroom Grade: K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hallway Arrival/Dismissal Referring Staff: _____________________ Classroom Other ________ Problem Behavior Possible Motivation Administrative Decision Minor Inappropriate language Obtain peer attention Loss of privilege Physical contact Obtain adult attention Time in office Defiance Obtain items/activities Conference with Disruption Avoid Peer(s) student Property misuse Avoid Adult Parent Contact Other ______________ Avoid task or activity Individualized Major Don’t know instruction Abusive language Other ______________ In-school suspension Fighting/ Physical (____hours/ days) aggression Out of school Overt Defiance suspension (_______ Harassment/ tease/ days) taunt Other ______________ Disruption Other ______________ Others involved in incident: None Peers Staff Teacher Substitute Unknown Other If peers were involved, list them ___________________________________________ Other comments: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ I need to talk to the students’ teacher I need to talk to the administrator Parent Signature: __________________________ Date: __________________ All minors are filed with classroom teacher. Three minors equal a major. All majors require administrator consequence parent contact and signature.
  • 119. Page 119 Example C Office Discipline Referral Form Name: _________________________ Grade: _____ Date: _____________ Referring Person: ______________________________ Time: ____________ Other Student(s) involved: ___________________________________________ Issue of Concern Location Possible Motivation Major Problem Behaviors  abusive lang  playground  Attention from peer(s) fighting/physical agg  cafeteria  Attention from adult(s)  harassment  passing area  Avoid peer(s)  overt defiance  bathroom  Avoid adult(s) Minor Problem Behaviors  arrival/dismissal  Avoid work  inappropriate. lang  classroom O btain item(s)  disruption  restricted area  Other _______________  property misuse  special event  Don’t know  non -compliance  common instructional area What happened?___________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ Consequences  lose recess  lose other privilege ___________________________  conference  in-school suspension  parent contact  out of-school suspension -  follow up agreement See Follow-Up Agreement Over
  • 120. Page 120 Follow up Agreement Name: __________________________ Date: __________________ 1. What rule(s) did you break? (Circle) Be Safe Be Respectful Be Responsible 2. What did you want?  I wanted attention from others  I wanted to be in control of the situation  I wanted to challenge adult(s)  I wanted to avoid doing my work  I wanted to be sent home  I wanted revenge  I wanted to cause problems because I feel miserable inside  I wanted to cause others problems because they don’t like me  I wanted _________________________________________ 3. Did you get what you wanted?  yes  no 4. What will you do differently next time? I will be _____________________________ by _________________________ 5. Student signature: __________________________________________ 6. Adult signature(s): _____________________________________
  • 121. Page 121 ™ Documentation Project Readiness Checklist Version 1.2 June 20, 2003 Anne W. Todd & Rob H. Horner Intended Audience SWIS Facilitators use the Readiness Checklist to prepare schools for SWIS compatibility prior to the licensing process Description The Readiness Checklist is a list of ten requirements for obtaining a SWIS License Agreement. For more Information Go to www.swis.org
  • 122. Page 122 SWIS™ Readiness Checklist SWIS™ Facilitator_________________________________ School___________________________________ Year______________ Requirement Tasks to Complete Who will By When Date of Complete Completion 1. School-wide discipline is one of the top three goals for the school. 2. Administrative support for the implementation and use of SWIS™ is available. 3. A behavior support team exists, and they review referral data at least once a month. 4. The school uses an office discipline referral form that is compatible with SWIS™ referral entry. 5. The school has a coherent office discipline referral procedure that includes (a) definitions for behaviors resulting in office-managed vs. staff-managed referrals and (b) a predictable system for managing disruptive behavior. 6. Data entry time is allocated and scheduled to ensure that office referral data will be current to within a week at all times. 7. Three People within the school are identified to receive one, 2-hour training on the use of SWIS™. 8. The school has computer access to Internet, and one of two web browsers. (Netscape 6, Internet Explorer 5) 9. The school agrees to on-going training for the team receiving SWIS™ data on uses of SWIS™ information for discipline decision-making. 10. The school district agrees to provide a facilitator who will work with school personnel on data collection and decision- making procedures.
  • 123. Page 123 ™ Documentation Project Compatibility Checklist Version 2.0 September 12, 2002 Anne W. Todd Intended Audience The Compatibility Checklist is used primarily by SWIS Facilitators to support school teams as they design a system for documenting and monitoring office discipline referrals that is SWIS-compatible. School teams can also use the checklist as they prepare a coherent system for dealing with problem behavior in their school and for the use of SWIS> Description The Compatibility Checklist is an available tool for ensuring that all necessary categories are being documented on a referral form. For more Information Go to www.swis.org
  • 124. Page 124 Procedure for Documenting Office Discipline Referrals SWIS II™ Compatibility Checklist School __________________________________ Date _______________ Date Date Compatibility Question 1. Does a clear distinction exist between problem behaviors that are staff management versus office managed exist and is it available for Yes No Yes No staff reference? 2. Does a form exist that is SWIS compatible for SWIS data entry Yes No Yes No including the following categories? a. Student name? Yes No Yes No b. Date? Yes No Yes No c. Time of incident? Yes No Yes No d. Student’s teacher (optional)? Yes No Yes No e. Student’s grade level? Yes No Yes No f. Referring staff member? Yes No Yes No g. Location of incident? Yes No Yes No h. Problem behavior? Yes No Yes No i. Possible motivation? Yes No Yes No j. Others involved? Yes No Yes No k. Administrative decision? Yes No Yes No l. Other comments? Yes No Yes No m. No more than 3 extra info. Yes No Yes No 3. Does set of definitions exist that clearly defines all categories on Yes No Yes No the office discipline referral form? 4. Does office discipline referral procedure and form exist that meet Yes No Yes No SWIS criteria? Next review date: _______________ Redesign your form until answers to all questions are “Yes.”
  • 125. Page 125 Appendix N Restraint and Seclusion Considerations and SWPBS
  • 126. Page 126 Considerations for Seclusion and Restraint Use in School-wide Positive Behavior Supports11 Robert Horner and George Sugai Co-directors OSEP Technical Assistance Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Support April 29, 2009 Concern Seclusion and restraint (S/R) refer to safety procedures in which a student is isolated from others (seclusion) or physically held (restraint) as a response by trained staff to serious problem behavior that places the student or others at risk of injury or harm. A review of the history of S/R indicates that these procedures are prone to misapplication and abuse placing students at equal or more risk than their problem behavior. Concerns include the following: 1. S/R are inappropriately selected and implemented as “treatment” or “behavioral intervention,” rather than as a safety procedure. 2. S/R are inappropriately used for behaviors that do not place the student or others at risk of harm or injury (e.g., noncompliance, threats, disruption). 3. Students, peers, and/or staff may be physically hurt or injured during attempts to conduct S/R. 4. Risk of injury and harm is increased because S/R are implemented by staff who are not adequatelyand expertly trained. 5. Use of S/R may inadvertently result in reinforcement or strengthening of the problem behavior. 6. S/R are implemented independent of comprehensive and function-based behavioral intervention plans. Toward Effective Policy 1. The majority of problem behaviors that are used to justify S/R could be prevented with early identification and intensive early intervention. The need for S/R procedures is in part a result of insufficient investment in prevention efforts. 2. S/R can be included as a safety response, but should not be included in a behavior support plan without a formal functional behavioral assessment (a process used to identify why the problem behavior continues to occur). 11 The development of this paper was supported in part by a grant from the Office of Special Education Programs, U.S. Department of Education (H029D40055). Opinions expressed herein are the author’s and do not reflect necessarily the position of the US Department of Education, and such endorsements should not be inferred. Contact: Rob Horner (Robh@uoregon.edu), OSEP Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (www.pbis.org), University of Oregon, Eugene.
  • 127. Page 127 3. S/R should only be implemented (a) as safety measures (b) within a comprehensive behavior support plan, (c) by highly trained personnel, and (d) with public, accurate, and continuous data related to (1) fidelity of implementation and (2) impact on behavioral outcomes (both increasing desired and decreasing problem behaviors). 4. School-wide positive behavior support may be an effective approach for (a) decreasing problem behaviors that may otherwise require S/R, (b) improving the fidelity with which intensive individual behavior support plans are implemented, and (c) improving the maintenance of behavioral gains achieved through intensive individual support plans. School-wide Positive Behavior Support School-wide Positive Behavior Support (SWPBS) is a systems approach to establishing the social culture needed for schools to achieve social and academic gains while minimizing problem behavior for all students.SWPBS is NOT a specific curriculum, intervention, or practice, but a decision making framework that guides selection, integration, and implementation of scientifically-based academic and behavioral practices for improving academic and behavior outcomes for all students.A central feature of SWPBS is implementation of behavioral practices throughout the entire school. SWPBS defines practices that all students experience in all parts of the school and at all times of day. SWPBS emphasizes four integrated elements: (a) socially valued and measurable outcomes, (b) empirically validated and practical practices, (c) systems that efficiently and effective support implementation of these practices, and (d) continuous collection and use of data for decision-making. These four elements are operationalized by five guiding principles: Invest first in prevention to establish a foundation intervention that is empirically validated to be effective, efficient and sustainable. Teach and acknowledge appropriate behavior before relying on negative consequences. Use regular “universal screening” to identify students who need more intense support and provide that support as early as possible, and with the intensity needed to meet the student’s need. Establish a continuum of behavioral and academic interventions for use when students are identified as needing more intense support. Use progress monitoring to assess (a) the fidelity with which support is provided and (b) the impact of support on student academic and social outcomes. Use data for continuous improvement of support. Research Supporting Implementation of School-wide Positive Behavior Support 1. Schools are able to implement SWPBS as evidenced by more than 9000 schools using SWPBS across the nation.
  • 128. Page 128 2. Schools that implement SWPBS demonstrate reductions in problem behavior and improved academic outcomes. 3. Preliminary evaluation data indicate that more intensive individual student behavior support is perceived as more effective (and less likely to be needed) when SWPBS is implemented.
  • 129. Page 129 Appendix O Planning for the Beginning and End of the School Year
  • 130. PBS Preparation - 130 School-wide PBS: Preparation for the Conclusion and Start of the School Year12 George Sugai University of Connecticut Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supporiots (April 27, 2010 revised) This worksheet is designed to assist school-wide positive behavior support (SWPBS) leadership teams in planning and preparing for the conclusion of the current school year and the beginning of the next school year. The two most important guidelines are to (a) maintain routines and expectations until the last day of school and establish and (b) begin teaching and learning activities on the first day of school General Guidelines 1. Work as a team. 2. Make decisions based upon data. 3. Consider needs of all students. 4. Integrate PBS activities into other initiatives and projects. 5. Begin teaching, learning, and behavioral expectations on the first day. 6. Involve students, staff, parents, and community. 7. Maintain typical daily instructional and behavioral routines until the last day of school. 8. Increase use of reminders and precorrections before and after transitions. 9. Increase/maintain high rates of positive acknowledgements. 10. Specify expected outcomes of every activity. 12 This document was prepared, in part, by the Technical Assistance Center on Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports and a grant from the Office of Special Education Programs, U.S. Department of Education (H326S980003). Opinions expressed herein do not necessarily reflect the position of the U.S. Department of Education, and such endorsements should not be inferred. For information about the Center, go to www.pbis.org, or for information related to this manuscript, contact George Sugai at George.sugai@uconn.edu or Robert Horner at Robh@uoregon.edu. When using this document, cite the Center on PBIS as the source.
  • 131. PBS Preparation - 131 Preparation for CONCLUSION of School Year Priority 13 Objective Activity Who When (h, m, l) 1. Prepare students for next grade/teachers 2. Prepare next grade/teachers for new students 3. Prepare students for transition to new school 4. Teach/precorrect expectations and routines for end of school year 5. Review and reinforce expected behaviors 13 High, Medium, Low priority
  • 132. PBS Preparation - 132 6. Arrange events to celebrate successes of all student and staff 7. Survey staff on status of school-wide PBS (e.g., EBS survey) 8. Review and evaluation office referral and/or discipline data for year 9. Review/evaluate PBS accomplishments (action plans) for year 10. Prepare proactive transition plans for at and high risk students 11. Inform parents about student, classroom, and school successes and accomplishments
  • 134. PBS Preparation - 134 Preparation for START of School Year Priority Objective Activity Who When (h, m, l) 1. Set PBS team meeting schedule 2. Review membership of PBS team 3. Update written policies and procedures 4. Collect data to establish/modify PBS action plan for next year 5. Orient new staff members
  • 135. PBS Preparation - 135 6. Teach expectations to new students 7. Review/reteach expectations with returning students 8. Orient parents 9. Set up data management system 10. Develop proactive transition plan for at- or high- risk students